巴利语辭典

诸大德合编

Rājagirika: {'def': 'Rājagiriya m. 王山部 [南方大衆部案達派中の部派名].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Rājahaŋsa: {'def': '【阳】王室天鹅（其喙和脚皆红色）。(p266)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Rājahaṁsa: {'def': '【阳】王室天鹅(其喙和脚皆红色)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rājaka: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [rāja+ka, the ending belonging to the whole cpd.] characteristic of the king, king-; in cpds. arājaka without a king J.VI,39 (raṭṭhe); sarājaka including the king Tikp 26; f. sarājikā Vin.I,209 (parisā). Also in phrase anikkhanta-rājake (Loc. abs.) when the king has not gone out Vin.IV,160. (Page 568)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rājaratha: {'def': '【阳】皇家马车。Dhp.v.151.：Jīranti ve rājarathā sucittā, atho sarīram pi jaraṁ upeti. Sataña dhammo na jaraṁ upeti, santo have sabbhi pavedayanti.(富丽辇舆要当朽，色身老来亦当同。唯善人法(=圣教)永不老，善人在在传真善。) cf. bhaddayāna, 【中】辇舆(ㄋㄧㄢˇㄩˊ)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rājati: {'def': '[rāj, cp. rajati & rañjati] to shine VvA.134 (=vijjotati). Cp. vi°. (Page 568)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(rāj+a), 照耀。【过】rāji。【过分】rājita。【现分】rajamāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rājatta: {'def': '【中】君主身份。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】君主身份。(p266)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Rājatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. rājā] state of being a king, kingship, sovereignty J.I,119 (anuttara-dhamma° being a most righteous king). (Page 568)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rājañña: {'def': '【阳】战士阶级的人（印度的世袭阶级）。(p266)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】战士阶级的人(印度的世袭阶级)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. rājā, cp, Vedic rājanya] “royalty”; a high courtier, a khattiya (=rājabhogga, cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung 100) D.I,103 (Pasenadi rājā . . . uggehi vā rājaniyehi vā kañcid eva mantanaṁ manteyya); DA.I,273 (=anabhisittā kumārā, i. e. uncrowned princes); Miln.234; VvA.297 (Pāyāsi r.). (Page 568)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rāji: {'def': '² [fr. rāga?] dissension, quarrel, in phrase saṅgha° (+saṅghabheda) Vin.II,203 (quoted at VbhA.428); IV,217. (Page 570)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [cp. Sk. rāji] a streak, line, row Sn.p. 107 (nīla-vana° =dark line of trees, expl^d as nīla-vana rukkha-panti SnA 451); Vv 64⁴ (nabhyo sata-rāji-cittita “coloured with 100 streaks”; VvA=lekhā); 64⁶ (veḷuriya°); pabbata° a mountain range J.II,417; dīgha° (adj.) of long lineage PvA.68; dvaṅgula° a band 2 inches broad Dāvs.V,49; roma° a row of hair (on the body) J.V,430. (Page 570)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】（一）排，线，行列，意见不合。(p266)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】(一)排，线，行列，意见不合。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rājiddhi: {'def': '【阴】王室力量。(p267)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】王室力量。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rājikā: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Sk. rājikā] a certain (gold) weight (a seedcorn of Sinapis ramosa) Th.1, 97=862 (kaṁsa sata° 100 mustard seeds in weight, i. e. very costly); J.VI,510 (kaṁse sovaṇṇe satarājike). (Page 570)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rājimant: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. rāji¹] having streaks or stripes; f. rājimatī shining, radiant Vv 32¹ (v. l. rājāputti), expl^d at VvA.134 as follows: “rājati vijjotatī ti rājī: rājī ti matā paññātā rājimatī” (thus connecting °mant with man). (Page 570)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rājin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. rāji] having streaks or stripes, in uddhagga° having prominent stripes (of a lion) J.IV,345. (Page 570)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rājinī: {'def': '【阴】皇后。(p267)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】皇后。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rājisi: {'def': '【阳】王室预言者。(p267)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】王室预言者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rājita: {'def': 'see vi°. (Page 570)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【过分】已灿烂，已照耀。(p266)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【过分】已灿烂，已照耀。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rājorodha: {'def': '【阳】国王的闺房，王妃。(p267)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】国王的闺房，王妃。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rājula: {'def': '[cp. Sk. rājila] a certain reptile Abhp 651. (Page 570)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rājupaṭṭhāna: {'def': '【中】对国王的伺候。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】对国王的伺候。(p267)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Rājuyyāna: {'def': '【中】王室花园。(p267)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】王室花园。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rājā: {'def': '(Rājan) [cp. Vedic rājā, n-stem. To root *reg, as in Lat. rego (to lead, di-rect, cp. in meaning Gr. h(gemw/n): see etym. under uju. Cp. Oir. rī king, Gallic Catu-rīx battle king, Goth reiks=Ohg. rīhhi=rich or Ger. reich. Besides we have *reig in Ags. r&amacremacr;cean= reach; Ger. reichen. -- The Dhtp only knows of one root rāj in meaning “ditti” i. e. splendour] king, a ruling potentate. The defⁿ at Vin.III,222 is “yo koci rajjaṁ kāreti.” The fanciful etym. at D.III,93= Vism.419 is “dhammena pare rañjetī ti rājā” i. e. he gladdens others with his righteousness. -- At the latter passage the origin of kingly government is given as the third stage in the constitution of a people, the 2 preceding being mahā-sammata (general consent) and khattiya (the land-aristocrats). -- Cases. We find 3 systems of cases for the original Sk. forms, viz. the contracted, the diæretic and (in the pl.) a new formation with --ū-. Thus Gen. & Dat. sg. rañño [Sk. rājñaḥ] Vin.III,107; IV,157; J.II,378; III,5; Vv 74⁴; and rājino Sn.299, 415; Th.2, 463; J.IV,495; Mhvs 2, 14; Instr. sg. raññā Vin.III,43; J.V,444; DhA.I,164; PvA.22; VbhA.106; and rājinā [Sk. rajña] Mhvs 6, 2; Acc. sg. rājānaṁ Vin.IV,157; Loc. raññe PvA.76; Voc. rāja Sn.422, 423. pl. Nom. rājāno A.I,68; Gen. Dat. raññaṁ [Sk. rājñaṁ] D.II,87; Mhvs 18, 32; and rājūnaṁ Vin.I,228; Ud.11; J.II,104; III,487; SnA 484; PvA.101, 133; Instr. raññāhi A.I,279 rājūhi Ud.41; M.II,120; J.I,179; III,45; Mhvs 5, 80; 8, 21; and rājubhi D.II,258. Cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 92¹. -- 1. rājā is a term of sovereignship. The term rājā as used in Buddhist India does not admit of a uniform interpretation and translation. It is primarily an appellative (or title) of a khattiya, and often the two are used promiscuously. Besides, it has a far wider sphere of meaning than we convey by any trslⁿ like “king” or even “sovereign,” or “prince.” We find it used as a designation of “king” in the sense of an elected or successory (crowned) monarch, but also in the meaning of a distinguished nobleman, or a local chieftain, or a prince with var. attributes characterizing his position according to special functions. From this we get the foll. scheme: (a) [based on mythological views: the king as representing the deity, cp. deva= king. Note that rājā never takes the place of deva in the meaning king, but that mahārāja is used in Voc. equivalent to deva] a world-king, over-lord, a so-called cakkavatti rājā. This is an office (as “Universal King”) peculiar to the Mahāpurisa or the (mythol.) “Great Man,” who may become either the Saviour of men in the religious sense, a Sammā-sambuddha, or a just Ruler of the earth in the worldly sense, a King of Righteousness. These are the 2 gatis of such a being, as described at var. places of the Canon (e. g. Sn.p. 106; Sn.1002, 1003; D.III,142; A.I,76). His power is absolute, and is described in the standard phrase “c. dhammiko dhamma-rājā cāturanto vijitāvī janapadatthāvariya-ppatto satta-ratana-samannāgato,” e. g. D.III,59. Dhammapāla gives the dignity of a C. as the first “human sovereign powers” (PvA.117). ‹-› The four iddhi’s of a C. are given (quite crudely) at M.III,176: he is beautiful, lives longer than others, is of a healthier constitution than others, he is beloved by the brahmins and householders. Other qualities: how his remains should be treated=D.II,141; deserves a thūpa D.II,142 sq.; his four qualities D.II,145 (the 4 assemblies of khattiyas, brāhmaṇas, gahapatis & samaṇas are pleased with him). See under cakkavatti & ratana. -- In a similar sense the term dhamma-rājā is used as Ep. of the Buddha Sn.554 (rāj’âham asmi dh-.r. anuttaro); J.I,262; and a reflection of the higher sphere is seen in the title of politeness (only used in Voc.) mahārāja, e. g. Sn.416 (addressed to Bimbisāra) PvA.22 (id.); J.VI,515. -- (b) [in a larger constitutional state] the crowned (muddhâvasitta) monarch (i. e. khattiya) as the head of the principality or kingdom. The defⁿ of this (general) rājā at Nd² 542 is significant of the idea of a king prevalent in early Buddhist times. It is: “khattiyo muddh’âbhisitto vijita-saṅgāmo nihata-paccāmitto laddh’adhippāyo paripuṇṇa-koṭthāgāro,” i. e. “a crowned noble, victorious in battle, slaying his foes, fulfilling his desires, having his storehouses full.” This king is “the top of men” (mukhaṁ manussānaṁ) Vin.I,246=Sn.568. Cp. D.I,7; Sn.46 (raṭṭhaṁ vijitam pahāya); J.V,448 and passim. See also below 3. 4 & 6. -- In similes: see J.P.T.S. 1907, 128; & cp. Vism.152 (r. va saddh’antagato), 336 (wishing to become an artisan). Here belongs the title of the king of the devas (Sakka) “deva-rājā,” e. g. DhA.III,269, 441; PvA.62. -- (c) [in an oligarchic sense] member of a kula of khattiyas, e. g. the kumāras of the Sakiyans and Koliyans are all called rājāno of the rājakulānaṁ in J. V,413 sq., or at least the heads of those kulas. Cp. B. Ind. p. 19. -- (d) [in a smaller, autocratic state] a chieftain, prince, ruler; usually (collectively) as a group: rājāno, thus indicating their lesser importance, e. g. A.V,22 (kuḍḍa-rājāno rañño cakkavattissa anuyuttā bhavanti: so read for anuyantā); Sn.553 (bhoja° similar to rāja-bhoggā or bhogiyā as given at SnA 453); A.II,74 sq. (dhammikā & a°); J.IV,495. Similarly at Vin.I,228 we find the division into the 3 ranks: mahesakkhā rājāno, majjhimā r., nīcā r. Here also belongs the designation of the 4 lokapālā (or Guardians of the World) at cattāro mahā-rājāno, the mahā° being added for sake of politeness (cp. Note A on mahā), e. g. A.IV,242. See also paṭirājā & cp. below 4 c. -- (e) A wider range of meaning is attached to several sub-divisions (with rājā or without): officials and men who occasionally take the place of the king (royal functionaries), but are by public opinion considered almost equal to the king. Here belongs the defⁿ of what is termed “rājāno” (pl. like d) at Vin.III,47, viz. rājā, padesa-rājā, maṇḍalikā, antarabhogikā, akkhadassā, mahāmattā, ye vā pana chejjabhejjaṁ anusāsanti (i. e. those who have juridical power). See also below 4 b, and °putta, °bhogga [& other cpds.]. -- 2. It would fill a separate book, if we were to give a full monograph of kingship in and after the Buddha’s time; we therefore content ourselves with a few principal remarks. The office of king was hereditary: kula-santakaṁ rajjaṁ J.I,395; II,116; IV,124; but we sometimes read of a king being elected with great pomp: J.I,470; PvA.74. He had the political and military power in his hand, also the jurisdiction, although in this he is often represented by the mahāmatta, the active head of the state. His 10 duties are mentioned at several places (see below under °dhammā). Others are mentioned e. g. at D.I,135, where it is said he gives food and seed-corn to the farmer, capital to the trader, wages to the people in government service. His qualifications are 8 fold (see D.I,137): well-born (“gentleman,” khattiya), handsome, wealthy, powerful (with his army), a believer, learned, clever, intelligent. ‹-› His wealth is proverbial and is characterized in a stock phrase, which is also used of other ranks, like seṭṭhi’s & brāhmaṇa’s, viz. “aḍḍha mahaddhana mahābhoga pahūta-jātarūpa-rajata pahūta-vitt’ûpakaraṇa pahūtadhana-dhañña paripuṇṇa-kosa-koṭṭhāgāra,” e. g. D.I,134. For a late description of a king’s quality and distinction see Miln.226, 227. -- His disciplinary authority is emphasized; he spares no tortures in punishing adversaries or malefactors, esp. the cora (see below 4 c). A summary example of these punishments inflicted on criminals is the long passage illustrating dukkha (bodily pain) at Nd² 304^III; cp. M.III,163 (here also on a cora). -- 3. The king (rājā or khattiya) in the popular opinion, as reflected in language, heads several lists, which have often been taken as enumerating “castes,” but which are simply inclusive statements of var. prominent ranks as playing a rôle in the social life of the state, and which were formulated according to diff. occasions. Thus some show a more political, some a more religious aspect. E. g. khattiya amacca brāhmaṇa gahapati D.I,136; rājā brāhmaṇa gahapatika A.I,68, where another formula has khattiya br. g. A.I,66; J.I,217; and the foll. with an intermediate “rank” (something like “royalty,” “the royal household”) between the king and the brahmins: rājā rājaputtā brāhmaṇā gahapatikā negama-jānapadā A.II,74 sq.; rājāno rāja-mahāmattā khattiyā br., gah., titthiyā D.III,44 (trslⁿ Dialogues too weak “rājas & their officials”); rājā rājabhogga br., gah. Vin.III,221. -- 4. Var. aspects illustrating the position of the king in relation to other prominent groups of the court or populace: (a) rājā & khattiya. All kings were khattiyas. The kh. is a noble kat)e)coxήn (cp. Gr. h(gemw/n) as seen fr. defⁿ jāti-khattiya at SnA 453 and var. contexts. Already in the Rig Veda the kṣatriya is a person belonging to a royal family (RV X.109, 3), and rājanya is an Ep. of kṣatriya (see Zimmer, Altindisches Leben 213). --rājā khattiyo muddhâvassito “a crowned king” D.I,69; III,61 sq.; Vin.IV,160; A.I,106 sq.; II,207 (contrasted with brāhmaṇa mahāsāla); III,299 (if lazy, he is not liked by the people); M.III,172 sq. (how he becomes a cakkavatti through the appearance of the cakka-ratana). -- Without muddhâvasitta: rājāno khattiyā Dh.294=Nett 165. Cp. khattiyā bhoja-rājāno the khattiyas, the (noble or lesser?) kings (as followers of the cakkavatti) Sn.553 (see bhoja). At J.VI,515. rājāno corresponds directly to khattiyā on p. 517 (saṭṭhisahassa°); cp. expression khattiya-kula J.I,217 as equivalent to rāja-kula. (b) rājā & mahāmatta. The latter occupies the position of “Premier,” but is a rank equal to the king, hence often called rājā himself: Vin.III,47 where styled “akkhadassa mahāmatta.” Otherwise he is always termed rāja-mahāmatta “royal minister,” or “H.R.H. the Premier,” e. g. Vin.I,172; A.I,279; Vin.I,228 (also as Magadha-mahāmatta), and called himself a khattiya D.III,44. -- (c) rājā & cora. A prominent figure in the affairs of State is the “robber-chief” (mahā-cora). The contrast-pair rajāno (so always pl.) & cora is very frequent, and in this connection we have to think of rājāno as either smaller kings, knights or royals (royalists), i. e. officers of the kings or “the king’s Guards.” Thus at J.III,34 the C. explⁿ as rāja-purisā. It is here used as a term of warning or frightening “get up, robber, so that the kings (alias “policeman” ) won’t catch you”: uṭṭhehi cora mā taṁ gahesuṁ rājāno. Other passages are e. g.: D.I,7 (rāja-kathā & corakathā)=Vin.I,188; M.III,163 (rājāno coraṁ āgucāriṁ gahetvā); A.I,68, 154; It.89 (rāj’âbhinīta+cor°); & in sequence rājāno corā dhuttā (as being dangerous to the bhikkhus) at Vin.I,150, 161. -- 5. On the question of kingship in Ancient India see Zimmer, Altind. Leben pp. 162--175, 212 sq.; Macdonell & Keith, Vedic Index II.210 sq.; Fick, Soc. Gl. 63--90; Foy, Die Königl. Gewalt nach den altind. Rechtsbüchern (Leipzig 1895); Rh. Davids, Buddhist India pp. 1--16; Hopkins, E. W., The social and military position of the ruling caste in A. I. in J.A.O.S. 13, 179 sq.; Banerjea, Public Administration in A. I. 1916, pp. 63--93. -- 6. Kings mentioned by name [a very limited & casual list only, for detailed refs. see Dict’y of Names]: Ajātasattu; Udena (DhA.I,185); Okkāka; Dīghī (of Kosala; Vin.I,342); Parantapa (of Kosambī; DhA.I,164;) Pasenadi (of Kosala; D.I,87, 103; Vin.IV,112, 157); Bimbisāra (of Magadha; Vin.IV,116 sq.; Sn.419); Bhaddiya; etc. -- 7. (fig.) king as sign of distinction (“princeps”), as the lion is called rājā migānaṁ Sn.72; Vism.650; the Himavant is pabbata-rājā A.I,152; III,44; and Gotama’s horse Kaṇthaka is called assa-rājā J.I,62=VvA.314. -- Note. The compⁿ form of rājā is rāja°.

--âgāra a king’s (garden- or pleasure-) house D.I,7 (°ka); DA.I,42. --aṅga royal mark, characteristic or qualification; king’s property Vin.I,219 (rājaṅgaṁ hatthī: the elephants belong to the king), cp. A.I,244: assājāniyo rañño aṅgan t’eva saṅkhaṁ gacchati is called king’s property. --aṅgana royal court PvA.74. --āṇatti king’s permission Tikp 26 (in simile). --āṇā (1) the king’s command J.III,180; cp. PvA.217 “rañño āṇā”; (2) the king’s fine or punishment, i. e. a punishment inflicted by the king (cp. Fick, Soc. Gl. 74), synonymous with rāja-daṇḍa: J.I,369, 433 (rājāṇaṁ karoti to inflict); II,197; III,18, 232, 351; IV,42; VI,18; PvA.242. --ânubhāva king’s power, majesty, authority, pomp J.IV,247; PvA.279. --antepura the royal harem A.V,81, 82 (the 10 risks which a bhikkhu is running when visiting it for alms). --âbhinīta brought by a king It.89 (+corâbhinīta). --âbhirājā “king of kings” Sn.553; DhsA.20. --âmacca royal minister J.V,444 (°majjhe). --āyatana N. of a tree: “Kingstead tree,” the royal tree (as residence of a king of fairies), Buchanania latifolia Vin.I,3 sq. (where MVastu III,303 reads kṣīrikā, i. e. milk-giving tree); J.I,80; IV,361 sq.; DhsA.35; VbhA.433 (°cetiya). --iddhi royal power PvA.279. --isi a royal seer, a king who gives up his throne & becomes an ascetic (cp. Sk. rājarṣi, freq. in Mhbhārata & Rāmā yana) Th.1, 1127 (read rāja-d-isi); It.21 (rājīsayo, with var vv. ll. not quite the same meaning); J.VI,116, 124, 127, 518; DhA.IV,29. Kern, Toev. s. v. proposes reading rājīsi. --upaṭṭhāna attendance on the king, royal audience Vin.I,269; J.I,269, 349; III,119, 299; IV,63. --ûpabhoga fit for use by the king Miln.252. --uyyāna royal garden or pleasure ground J.III,143; Mhvs 15, 2. --orodhā a lady from the king’s harem, a royal concubine Vin.IV,261. --kakudha-bhaṇḍa an ensign of royalty (5: khagga, chatta, uṇhīsa, pādukā, vālavījanī) DhA.I,356. See under kakudha. --kathā talk about kings (as tiracchānakathā in disgrace), comb^d with corakathā (see above 4 c) D.I,7; III,36, 54; Vin.I,188. --kammika a royal official, one employed by the king J.I,439; IV,169. --kuṭumba the king’s property J.I,439. --kuṇḍa a “crook of a king” DhA.III,56. --kumāra a (royal) prince (cp. khattiya-kumāra) Vin.I,269; J.III,122; VbhA.196 (in comparison). --kumbhakāra a “royal potter,” i. e. a potter being “purveyor to the king” J.V,290. --kula the king’s court or palace A.I,128; II,205; Vin.IV,265; J.II,301; DhA.II,44, 46; III,124. --khādāya puṭṭha at Sn.831 is according to Kern, Toev. to be read as rajakkhatāya ph. (fr. rajakkha). The old Niddesa, however, reads °khādāya & expl^ns the word (Nd¹ 171) by rājabhojanīyena, i. e. the king’s food, which is alright without being changed. --guṇa “virtue of a king” M.I,446 (trick of a circus horse; +rāja-vaṁsa). --daṇḍa punishment ordered by the king PvA.216, 217. --dāya a royal gift D.I,127; DA.I,246. --dūta king’s messenger Sn.411, 412; in meaning of “message,” i. e. calling somebody to court, summons at J.II,101, 305. --dhamma “king’s rule,” i. e. rule of governing, norm of kingship; usually given as a set of 10, which are enum^d at J.III,274 as “dāna, sīla, pariccāga, ajjava, maddava, tapo, akkodha, avihiṁsā, khanti, avirodhana,” i. e. alms-giving, morality, liberality, straightness, gentleness, self-restriction, non-anger, non-hurtfulness, forbearance non-opposition. These are referred to as dasa rājadhammā at J.I,260, 399; II,400; III,320; V,119, 378; usually in phrase “dasa rāja-dhamme akopetvā dhammena rajjan kāresi”: he ruled in righteousness, not shaking the tenfold code of the king. Another set of 3 are mentioned at J.V,112, viz. “vitathaṁ kodhaṁ hāsaṁ nivāraye” (expl^d as giving up musāvāda, kodha & adhamma-hāsa). --dhānī a royal city (usually comb^d with gāma & nigama) A.I,159; II,33; III,108; Vin.III,89; J.V,453; Pv 13¹⁸. --dhītā king’s daughter, princess J.I,207; PvA.74. --nivesana the king’s abode, i. e. palace DhA.IV,92. --parisā royal assembly Vin.II,296. --pīla (?) DhA.I,323. --putta lit. “king’s son,” prince, one belonging to the royal clan (cp. similarly kulaputta), one of royal descent, Rājput Sn.455; Miln.331; VbhA.312, 319 (in simile); PvA.20. f. °puttī princess J.IV,108; V,94. --purisa “king’s man,” only in pl. °purisā the men of the king, those in the king’s service (as soldiers, body-guard, policeman etc.) J.III,34; VbhA.80 (°ânubandha-corā), 109. --porisa (m. & nt.) servant of the king, collectively: king’s service, those who devote themselves to Govt. service D.I,135; M.I,85=Nd² 199; A.IV,281, 286. See also porisa. --bali royal tax J.I,354. --bhaṭa king’s hireling or soldier Vin.I,74, 88; SnA 38 (in simile) --bhaya fear of the king(‘s punishment) Vism.121. --bhāga the king’s share J.II,378. --bhogga 1. royal, in the service of the king, in foll. phrases: rāja-bhoggaṁ raññā dinnaṁ rāja-dāyaṁ brahma-deyyaṁ D.I,87, of a flourishing place. Dial. I.108 trsl^s “with power over it as if he were king,” and expl^s with: “where the king has proprietary rights.” The C. rather unmeaningly expl^s as “rāja-laddha” (DA.I,245). The BSk. has a curious version of this phrase: “rājñā-agni- dattena brahmadeyyaṁ dattaṁ” (given by the king in the place of agni?) Divy 620. -- Further at Vin.III,221 in sequence rājā r-bhogga, brāhmaṇa, gahapatika, where the C. expl^s (on p. 222) as “yo koci rañño bhatta-vetan’āhāro.” (We should be inclined to take this as No. 2.) -- Thirdly, in stock phrase “rājâraha rājabhogga rañño aṅgan t’eva saṅkhaṁ gacchati,” i. e. worthy of a king, imperial, he justifies the royal qualification, said of a thoroughbred horse at A.I,244= II.113; of a soldier (yodh’ājīva) at A.I,284; of an elephant at J.II,370 (where it is expl^d as “rāja paribhoga”). Also as “royal possessions” in general at DhA.I,312. 13. -- Fick, Soc. Gl. 99 does not help much, he takes it as “king’s official.” -- 2. royal, of royal power, one entitled to the throne. Either as bhogga, bhogiya (SnA 453) or (khattiyā) bhoja-rājāno (Sn.553). Thus at Vin.III,221, where it takes the place of the usual khattiya “royal noble” & Sn.553, where it is comb^d (as bhoja rājano) with khattiyā. See also bhoja & cp. (antara) bhogika and rājañña. --mahāmatta king’s prime minister (see above 4 b, to which add:) D.III,44; A.I,154, 252, 279; III,128; VbhA.312 (simile of 2), 340. --mālakāra royal gardener J.V,292. --muddā the royal seal DhA.I,21. --muddikā id. SnA 577. --ratha the king’s chariot DhA.III,122. --rukkha “royal tree,” Cathartocarpus fistula VvA.43. --vara the best king, famous king Vv 32¹ (=Sakka VvA.134). --vallabha the king’s favourite, or overseer Mhvs 37, 10; VbhA.501 (in simile). --vibhūti royal splendour or dignity PvA.216, 279. --haṁsa “royal swan,” a sort of swan or flamingo Vism.650 (suvaṇṇa°, in simile). (Page 568)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rājāmacca: {'def': '【阳】王室部长。(p266)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】王室部长。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rājānubhāva: {'def': '【阳】国王的壮丽或最高权威。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】国王的壮丽或最高权威。(p266)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Rājāyatana: {'def': '【阳】阔叶山檨子（见 Khīrikā）。(p266)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】阔叶山檨子(Buchanania Latifolia，见 Khīrikā)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rājāṇā: {'def': '【阴】国王的谕令。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】国王的谕令。(p266)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Rāma: {'def': '[fr. ram; cp. Vedic rāma] pleasure, sport, amusement; °kara having pleasure, sporting, making love J.V,448. (Page 570)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rāmaṇeyyaka: {'def': '(adj. nt.) [orig. grd. of rāmeti, ram, cp. Sk. rāmaṇīya. On e for ī see Geiger, P.Gr. § 10] pleasant, agreeable, lovely A.I,35, 37; Dh.98 (=ramaṇīya DhA.III,195); nt. delightfulness, lovely scenery M.I,365 (four seen in a dream: ārāma°, vana°, bhūmi° pokkharaṇī°). (Page 570)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】愉快的，可爱的。(p267)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】愉快的，可爱的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rāsi: {'def': '[Vedic rāśi] 1. heap, quantity, mass It.17; usually --°, e. g. aṅgāra° heap of cinders J.I,107; kaṇikārapuppha° of k. flowers VvA.65; kahāpaṇa° of money PvA.162, tila° of seeds VvA.54; dhañña° of corn A.IV,163, 170; etc. --rāsiṁ karoti to make a heap, to pile up Mhvs 29, 28; VvA.157. -- 2. (store of) wealth, riches; in °agga-dāna gift of the best treasures (of one’s property), one of the 5 “donations of the best,” viz. khett°, rās°, koṭṭh°, kumbhi°, bhojan°: SnA 270. See also °vaḍḍhaka -- 3. a sign of the Zodiac (the 12, as given at Abhp 61 are: mesa, usabha, methuna, kakkata, sīha, kaññā, tulā, vicchikā, dhanu, makara, kumbha, mīna; or the ram, bull, twins, crab, lion, virgin, balance, scorpion bow, capricorn, waterpot, fish) PvA.198. -- 4. (fig.) at t. t. in logic: group, aggregate, category, congery; freq. in Abhidhamma-literature, where 3 “accumulations” are spoken of, viz. micchatta-niyato rāsi, sammatta-niyato r., anivato r. or “wrong doing entailing immutable evil results, that of well-doing entailing immutable good results, and that of everything not so determined” (Dialogues III,210); D.III,217; Kvu 611; Nett 96; cp. Kvu trsl. 356 Dhs.trsl. 26, 253. In the 5 factors of individuality (body and mind) khandhā are explained as meaning rāsi, e. g. Asl. 141; B. Psy. 42. In other connections: S.V,146 (kusala°, akusala°), 186; A.III,65 (akusala°); Tikp 45. -- Note. In BSk. we find only 2 of the 3 categories mentioned at MVastu I.175, viz. mithyātvaniyato & aniyato rāśih.

--vaḍḍhaka one who increases wealth, i. e. a treasurer D.I,61 (trslⁿ: “increases the king’s wealth”; DA.I,170 simply defines “dhañña-rāsiñ ca dhana-rāsiñ ca vaḍḍhetī ti r. v.”); J.I,2; Mhbv 78. (Page 570)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】堆，量，聚集。rāsivaḍḍhaka,【阳】收入的管理员。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】堆，量。 ~vaḍḍhaka, 【阳】收入的管理员。(p267)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Rāsika: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. rāsi] revenue, fisc D.I,135. (Page 571)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rāti: {'def': '[Sk. rā to give, bestow; given at Dhtp 369 & Dhtm 597 in meaning “ādāne,” with doublet lā] to take up: no refs. (Page 570)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rāva: {'def': '【阳】哭声，嚎叫，噪音。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】哭声，嚎叫，噪音。(p267)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. ravati, cp. rava] crying, howling; shout, noise J.I,162 (baddha° the cry of one who is caught); IV,415 (id.); VI,475 (of the cries of animals, known to an expert); Miln.254 (bherava-rāvaṁ abhiravati); Mhvs 10, 69 (mahā-rāvaṁ arāvi). (Page 570)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rūhana: {'def': '【中】成长，起立，上升。(p268)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Rūhanā: {'def': '(cp. Sk. rohaṇa, fr. ruh: rūhati1),【阴】1.成长(growth)。2.治疗(healing)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(cp. Sk. rohaṇa, fr. ruh: rūhati1) 1.成长(growth J.II.322 (virūhanā C.))。2.治疗(healing (of a wound) Miln.112.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. Sk. rohaṇa, fr. ruh: rūhati¹] 1. growth J.II,322 (virūhanā C.). -- 2. healing (of a wound) Miln.112. (Page 576)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rūhati: {'def': '(ruh生长+a), 生长，登上，(创伤的)痊愈。【过】rūhi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(ruh + a), 生长，登上，（创伤的）痊愈。【过】 rūhi。(p268)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '1(the specific P. form of the usual Sk. P. rohati (q. v.). The root ruh is given at Dhtp 334 with meaning “janana”), 1.成长(to grow, spread It.67; J.IV.408 (akkhīni rūhiṁsu; also ppr. med. ruyhamāna))。2.治疗，靠近(to heal (of a wound), close up Vin.I,206 (vaṇo na rūhati))。3.有效(to have effect in (Loc.), to be effective Vin.II,203=It.87 (vādo tamhi na rūhati))。pp. rūḷha2. See also rūhita (pp. of Caus. rūheti=roheti).', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '2 (for rundh (rumbh, rudh) or Pass. rujjh°; see also rumbhati & ropeti2), 被打破(to be broken or (fig.) to be suspended Vin.II,55 (dhammattā rūhati the liability is cancelled). -- pp. rūḷha1.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [for rundh (rumbh, rudh) or Pass. rujjh°; see also rumbhati & ropeti²] to be broken or (fig.) to be suspended Vin.II,55 (dhammattā rūhati the liability is cancelled). -- pp. rūḷha¹. (Page 576)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [the specific P. form of the usual Sk. P. rohati (q. v.). The root ruh is given at Dhtp 334 with meaning “janana” i. e. causing, which refers more to the compounds with prefixes] 1. to grow, spread It.67; J.IV,408 (akkhīni rūhiṁsu; also ppr. med. ruyhamāna); V,368; VI,360. -- 2. to heal (of a wound), close up Vin.I,206 (vaṇo na rūhati); -- 3. to have effect in (Loc.), to be effective Vin.II,203=It.87 (vādo tamhi na rūhati). -- pp. rūḷha². See also rūhita (pp. of Caus. rūheti=roheti). (Page 576)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rūhita: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. rūhati¹] a boil, a diseased growth (lit. “healed”) Vin.IV,316 (expl^d as “yaṁ kiñci vaṇo”; v. l. rudhita). (Page 576)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(fr. rūhati1), 【中】疮(a boil, a diseased growth (lit. “healed”) Vin.IV,316 (expld as “yaṁ kiñci vaṇo”; v. l. rudhita).', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rūpa: {'def': '【中】色（相），外形，体形，图像，视野（眼睛的对象，即：所看到的东西），物质元素的合成物（即：地水火风所组成的物质体）。 ~ka,【中】小体形，直喻。 ~taṇhā, 【阴】色爱（色相的渴望）。 ~dassana,【中】见色（视界的察觉）。 ~bhava, 【阳】色有（梵天世界）。 ~rāga,【阳】色贪（渴望出生在色相的世界）。 ~vantu,【形】英俊的。 ~sampatti,【阴】美好的东西。 ~siri, 【阴】个人的光彩壮丽。 ~ārammaṇa, 【中】色缘（看得见的事物）。 ~avacara, 【形】色界的。(p268)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '色。究竟法的一种，不具有认知的能力，不会有所缘。它的特色是，它会受气温等影响而变坏、改变。在实际修行里，「色」指五根所直接经验到的五种感官对象，如颜色、声音、气味、味道、以及如热、冷、重、轻、硬、软等的触觉。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Vedic rūpa, connected etymologically with varpa (Grassmann). -- The Nom. pl. is rūpā & rūpāni] form, figure, appearance, principle of form, etc. -- A. Definitions. According to P. expositors rūpa takes its designation fr. ruppati, e. g. “ruppanato rūpaṁ” Vism.588; “ruppan’aṭṭhena r.” VbhA.3; “rūpa-rūpaṁ= ruppana sabhāvena yuttaṁ” Cpd. 156⁷ (where ruppati is, not quite correctly, given as “change”), “ruppatī ti: tasmā rūpan ti vuccati” S.III,86; other def^ns are “rūpayatī ti rūpaṁ” (with cakkhu & the other 10 āyatanas) VbhA.45; and more scientifically: “paresu rūp’ādisu cakkhu-paṭihanana lakkhaṇaṁ rūpaṁ” Vism.446. -- Of modern interpretations & discussions see e. g. Dhs. trsl. introd. ch. vi. (pp. 41--63, or ²48--71); Dial. II.244; Expos. 67ⁿ; Cpd. 270 sq. (where objections are raised to trslⁿ “form,” and as better (philosophical) terms “matter,” “material quality” are recommended). See also loka for similar etym. -- B. (lit.) appearance, form, figure Dhs.597 sq. (=form either contrasted with what is unseen, or taken for both seen and unseen), 751; Mhvs 27, 30 (sīha-vyagghādirūpāni representations of lions, tigers etc.); 30, 68 (ravicanda-tāra-rūpāni id.); 36, 31 (loha° bronze statue); ThA.257. -- Esp. beautiful form, beauty S.IV,275= Pv.II,9⁵⁸ (as one of the 10 attributes, with sadda etc., of distinction: see also below D.II,a); Miln.285; Mhvs 20, 4 (rūpa-māninī proud of her beauty); PvA.89. --surūpa very beautiful ThA.72; durūpa of evil form, ugly A.II,203 sq. (dubbaṇṇa+). -- In phrase rūpaṁ sikkhati Vin.I,77=IV.129 the meaning is doubtful; it may be “to study drawing, or arts & craft,” or (with Mrs. Rh. D.) “weights & measures,” or (w. Hardy) “money changing.” It is said that through this occupation the eyes become bad; it is opposed to gaṇanā. -- C. (-°) of such & such a form, like, kind, of a certain condition or appearance. In this applⁿ very frequent & similar to E. --hood, or Ger. --heit, i. e. an abstract formation. Often untranslatable because of the latter character. It is similar to kāya (cp. explⁿ of ātura‹-› rūpa Vv 83¹⁴ by abhitunna-kāya Vva 328), but not so much with ref. to life & feeling as to appearance and looks. E. g. aneka° Sn.1079 (=anekavidha Nd² 54); adissamāna° invisible PvA.6 (lit. with invisible form); ummatta° as if mad, under the appearance of madness, like a madman Pv.I,8¹; II,6³; eva° in such a condition Pv.II,1⁵; tapassī° appearing to be an ascetic Pv.I,3²; tāraka° the (shapes of the) stars Dhs.617; deva° as a deva PvA.92. Pleonastically e. g. in: anupatta° attaining Pv IV.1⁶⁶; taramāna° quickly Pv.II,6²; yutta° fit PvA.157; sucitta° variegated Pv.I,10⁹. -- Cases ad verbially: citta-rūpaṁ according to intention Vin.III,161; IV,177; cetabba-rūpaṁ fit to be thought upon J.IV,157. (=°yuttakaṁ C.). --atta-rūpena on my own account S.IV,97; godha-rūpena as an iguana Mhvs 28, 9. -- D. (as philos. t. t.) principle of (material) form, materiality, visibility. -- There are var. groups of psychological and metaphysical systematizations, in which rūpa functions as the material, gross factor, by the side of other, more subtle factors. In all these representations of rūpa we find that an element of moral psychology overshadows the purely philosophical & speculative aspect. A detailed (Abhidhammatic) discussion of rūpa in var. aspects is to be found at Dhs.§ 585--980. ‹-› 1. rūpa as āyatana or sense object. It is the object of the activity or sphere of the organ of sight (cakkhu). As such it heads the list of the 6 bāhirāni āyatanāni (see e. g. Nd² p. 238 A-E & āyatana³) with “cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā” (the others: sota›sadda, ghāna›gandha, jivhā›rasa, kāya›phoṭṭhabba, mano›dhamma), cp. cakkhu-viññeyyā rūpā iṭṭhā kantā etc. D.I,245; M.I,266; cakkhunā rūpaṁ passati iṭṭha-rūpaṁ kanta-rūpaṁ etc. S.IV,126; -- see further: Vin.I,34 (sabbaṁ ādittaṁ: cakkhuṁ ādittaṁ, rūpa ādittā etc. with sequence of other āyatanas); D.II,308 sq., 336 sq.; M.III,18 (yaṁ kho rūpaṁ paṭicca uppajjati sukhaṁ somanassaṁ, ayaṁ rūpe assādo; cp. Ps.II,109 sq.), 291 (ye te cakkhu-viññeyyesu rūpesu avīta-rāgā etc.); Ps.I,79; II,38 (rūpī rūpāni passatī ti vimokkho); Dhs.617, 653, 878; Tikp 28. ‹-› 2. (metaphysically) as the representative of sensory or material existence: (a) universally as forming the corporeal stratum in the world of appearance or form (rūpa- bhava) as compared with the incorporeal (arūpa-bhava), being itself above, and yet including the kāma-bhava. (The kāmabhava is a subdivision of rūpabhava, which has got raised into a third main division.) This triad is also found in comb^ns with loka or dhātu (see dhātu 2 a & d), or avacara. See e. g. D.I,17; III,215 (°dhātu), 216 (°bhava); Kvu 370 sq. (°dhātu); Dhs.499 (°âvacara), 585 (°dhātu); Vbh.17 (°āvacara), 25 (as garu-pariṇāma & dandha-nirodha comp^d with arūpa). A similar sequence rūpa arūpa & nirodha (i. e. nibbāna) in old verses at Sn.755; It.45, 62 (rūpehi arūpā santatarā, arūpehi nirodho santataro). On indriya-rūpa “faculty as form” see indriya B. -- (b) individually in the sphere of saṁsāra as one (i. e. the material quality) of the substrata of sensory individual existence or the khandhas. They are the 5: rūpa-kkhandha, vedanā°, saññā°, saṅkhārā°, viññāṇa°; otherwise called rūp’ûpādāna-kkhandha etc. (e. g. D.III,223, 278; Vism.443). See khandha II. B. -- In this property rūpa consists of 28 subdivisions, viz. the 4 (great) dhātūs (mahābhūtāni or else bhūta-rūpa primary matter) and 24 upādārūpāni (i. e. derivative forms or accidentals). These are given in extenso in the rūpakkhandha section of the Vism.(pp. 443--450), also at Dhs.585; the 24 consist of: cakkhu, sota, ghāna, jivhā, kāya, rūpa, sadda, gandha, rasa, itthindriya, purisindriya, jīvitindriya, hadaya‹-› vatthu, kāya-viññatti, vacī-viññatti, ākāsa-dhātu, (rūpassa) lahutā mudutā kammaññatā, upacaya santati jaratā aniccatā, kabaḷiṅkār’--āhāra; cp. defⁿ at Nett 73: cātu-mahābhūtikaṁ rūpaṁ catunnaṁ ca mahābhūtānaṁ upādāya rūpassa paññatti. The rūpakkhandha shares with the others the qualities of soullessness, evanescence and ill (anattā, anicca, dukkha); e. g. rūpañ ca h’idaṁ attā abhavissa, na y’idaṁ rūpaṁ ābadhāya saṁvatteyya Vin.I,13, cp. similarly M.III,282 sq.; S.III,66; quoted and expl^d in detail at Vism.610; rūpaṁ aniccaṁ Vin.I,14; M.I,228; III,18 (also expl^d at Vism.610); S.III,48, 66, 88; rūpe anicc’ânupassanā Ps.II,186 sq. -- See also D.II,301; III,233; Ps.I,23, 53, 104; II,96, 102, 109 (rūpassa ādīnavo); Vbh.1. sq., 12 sq. (in detail); Kvu 11 sq.; Vism.443 sq.; Tikp 33; VbhA.2, 3, 32 sq.=S.III,142 (with var. similes); DhA.IV,100. -- (c) in the making up of the individuality as such (nāma-rūpa), where in contrast with nāma (as abstract, logical, invisible or mind-factor) rūpa represents the visible (material) factor, resembling kāya (cp. phrase nāma-kāya in same sense). The foll. are current def^ns of nāma-rūpa: nāma-(kāya)=vedanā, saññā, cetanā, phassa, manasikāra (otherwise citta-saṅkhārā), rūpa(--kāya)=cattāro mahā-bhūtā catunnaṁ m-bhūtānaṁ upādāya rūpaṁ (otherwise kāya-saṅkhārā) S.II,4; III,59 sq.; Ps.I,183; with expl^ns at Vism.558 & VbhA.169. Defined at Nett 15: “ye phassa-pañcamakā dhammā: idaṁ nāmaṁ, yāni pañc’indriyāni rūpāni: idaṁ rūpaṁ, tad ubhayaṁ nāmarūpaṁ viññāṇa-sampayuttaṁ.” Discussed in detail also at Vism.562 (=VbhA.173, 174), 587--597; cp. DhsA.392 (Expos. 500, where “mind-matter” is given as corresp. couple in trslⁿ, do. Cpd. 271 sq. “mind and body”). See also under paṭicca-samuppāda. -- 3. various references: D.III,102, 212, 225, 244, 273; M.I,84 (Gotamo kāmānaṁ pariññaṁ paññāpeti, rūpānaṁ, vedanānaṁ); S.II,198; III,11 (evaṁ-rūpo siyaṁ, evaṁ vedano etc.), 101 (id., & the khandhas); Sn.867, 874, 943, 1037, 1121; Nd¹ 425; Tikp 36, 38, 54, 262; Vism.625 (uppajjanaka°).

--ārammaṇa a visible thing as object Dhs.146, 365; DhsA.310 (cp. Expos. 407). --âvacara world of form, sphere of matter (cp. Expos. 67, 216ⁿ, 264) PvA.163. --ûpaga (satta) (a being) living in (bodily) form It.62; Sn.754. --ūpajīvinī f. a woman living on her beauty, i. e. a harlot PvA.46, 201. --ññu knowing (var.) bodily forms M.I,220=A.V,347. --taṇhā craving after form D.II,309; III,216, 244, 280; VbhA.179 (in det.). --dakkha one clever in forms, viz. an artist (accountant?) Miln.344 (in the Dhamma-nagara). --dhātu the element of form, material element Vism.486; Nett 32, 97. See above D 2. --nimitta sign of form Ps.I,92. --patta beautiful J.I,61. --pamāṇika measuring by form (outward appearance), one of the 4 kinds of measurements which the world takes of the Tathāgata (see A.II,71 & Pug.53), viz. rūpa°, ghosa°, lūkha°, dhamma° DhA.III,113; the same four similarly at SnA 242. --pātubhāva appearance of form (also as °antara° intermediate form) SnA 245. --bhava material existence: see above D 2. --rāga lust after rebirth in rūpa D.III,234 (+arūpa°); Nett 28 (pañc’indriyāni rūpīni rūpa-rāgassa padaṭṭhānaṁ. --rūpa material form (mutable material quality?) Cpd. 156, doubtful trslⁿ & explⁿ --saññā perception of material qualities, notion of form D.I,34; II,112 (expl^d in det. at Vism.328); III,224, 244, 253; Nd² 545; DhsA.200 (cp. Expos. 269). --saññin perceiving form D.III,260; Ps.II,38; Sn.1113. --santati duration of material form Vism.431; VbhA.21. --samussaya accumulation of form, complex form ThA.98. --samāpatti attainment of beauty J.I,406. --sampatti beauty J.III,187. --siri personal splendour J.I,60. (Page 574)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '色,色身;物质;形相', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '(‹ruppati‹ rup(改变﹑毁灭))【中】色(相)，外形，体形，图像，视野(眼睛的对象，即：所看到的东西)，物质元素(即：地、水、火、风所组成的物质体)。世尊说：「诸比丘！你们如何说色(rūpaṁ)？’被破坏’(ruppati‹rup(改变﹑毁灭))故，诸比丘！由於它，它被叫做‘色’(rūpaṁ) (梵文rūpyata iti rūpam)。何以被破坏？以寒冷破坏，以炎热破坏，以饥饿破坏，以口渴破坏，以虻(ḍaṁsa=piṅgalamakkhikā牛虻)、蚊(makasa)、风(vātā =kucchivāta-piṭṭhivātādivasa受胃肠风、背部风等的支配)、热(ātapo= sūriyātapo太阳热)、爬虫类(sarīsapa蛇、蠍等)所咬而变坏。‘被破坏’故，诸比丘！由於它，它被叫做’色’。」(《相应部》S.22:79/III,86) rūpaka,【中】小体形，直喻。rūpakalāpa﹐色聚(物质的最小单位，最小含有八种成份：地、水、火、风、色、香、味、食素)。rūpataṇhā,【阴】色爱(色相的渴望)，或洁癖 (suddhe rūpabhavasmiṁyeva taṇhā rūpataṇhā. DhsA.#1065)。rūpadassana,【中】见色(视界的察觉)。rūpanimitta﹐色相。rūpabhava,【阳】色有(梵天世界)。rūparāga,【阳】色染(渴望出生在色相的世界)。rūpavantu,【形】英俊的。rūpasampatti,【阴】美好的东西。rūpasiri,【阴】个人的光彩壮丽。rūpārammaṇa,【中】色所缘(颜色)。rūpavacara,【形】色界的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rūpajivitindriya: {'def': '色命根。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}

Rūpaka: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. rupa] form, figure; likeness of, image (-°); representation Vin.II,113 (rūpak’okiṇṇāni pattāni, of painted bowls); Th.2, 394 (see ruppa°); DhA.I,370 (maṇi° jewelled image); II,69 (assa° toy horse); Mhvs 25, 26 (rāja°); 27, 30 (devatā° shape of devas); VvA.213. --dūrūpaka of squalid appearance J.II,167; cp. durūpa. (Page 575)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rūpakammaṭṭhāna: {'def': '﹐色业处。色业处的修法：色业处(rūpakammaṭṭhāna)：先修「四界分别观」(catudhātuvavatthāna四界差别观)，反覆观察四大种的十二种特相(地界：硬(kakkhalaṁ﹐hardness)、粗(pharusaṁ, roughness)、重(garukaṁ, heaviness)、软(mudukaṁ , softness)、滑(saṇhaṁ , smoothness)、轻(lahukaṁ, light)。水界：流动(paggharaṇa, flowing)、粘(abandhana , cohesion；由外向内的内聚力)。火界：热(uṇha , heat)、冷(sīta, coldness)。风界：刚强(vitthambhana；rigidity﹑maintaining)、推动(samudīraṇa, pushing；由内向外)，若完全熟练之后，全身变成透明状，进一步用功，可以观察到色聚(rūpakalāpa)，当能够看到色聚时，辨明每粒色聚里所有的色法，譬如「地、水、火、风、色、香、味、食素」。身体中有二十八种色法，它以8个乃至13个的的型态结合。观察它们必须由：「处门」(āyatana dvāra)或根门里的所有色法，身体部分的所有色法，所有四十二身分(三十二身分之外，另外加上：1.体内的四种火界2.体内的四种风界)。禅修者须破除三种密集(rūpa ghana，或色厚)：‘相续’、 ‘组合’与‘功用’。一、「相续密集」(santati ghana)：见到各种色聚，色法到了「住位」时，制造的几代食素八法聚。二、「组合密集」(samūha ghana)：当能够分别究竟色(paramattha rūpa)的自性相(sabhāva rūpa，即硬、软等。)，即已破除了组合密集。三、「功用密集」(kicca ghana)：见到色聚里的每个究竟色的作用(如‘眼净色’的作用是牵引心路过程至色所缘(色)、‘心所依处’的作用是作为意界和意识界的依处等等)。(请参考帕奥禅师：《智慧之光》)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rūpatta: {'def': '(abstr. fr. rūpa),【中】(lit. “form-hood,” i. e. shaping (being) shape(d) S.III,87 (rūpaṁ rūpattāya saṅkhātaṁ))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. rūpa] lit. “form-hood,” i. e. shaping (being) shape(d) S.III,87 (rūpaṁ rūpattāya saṅkhātaṁ). (Page 575)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rūpatā: {'def': '(abstr. fr. rūpa),【阴】形状，相貌((being) shape(d), appearance; accordance, conformity, in phrase bhavya-rūpatāya “by appearance of likelihood” A.II,191 (in hearsay formula, where it is missing in id. passage at Nd2 151).', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. rūpa] (being) shape(d), appearance; accordance, conformity, in phrase bhavya-rūpatāya “by appearance of likelihood” A.II,191 (in hearsay formula, where it is missing in id. passage at Nd² 151). (Page 575)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rūpavant: {'def': '(adj.) [rūpa+vant] 1. having bodily form S.III,16 & passim (in formula of sakkāya-diṭṭhi); Dhs.1003. -- 2. having the form of (-°) Mhvs 14, 3 (gokaṇṇa°). -- 3. beautiful Mhvs 10, 30 (f. rūpavatī). (Page 575)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '-rūpavant (rūpa+vant),【形】1.具有身体(having bodily form (gokaṇṇarūpavant)。2.美丽的(beautiful Mhvs 10, 30 (f. rūpavatī))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rūpeti: {'def': '[Caus. denom. fr. rūpa] 1. to put into shape, to make appear, to make grow (?) SnA 132, 143 (v. l. ropeti). -- 2. to be formed, to appear, to come to notice, in defⁿ of rūpa at VbhA.45: “rūpayatī ti rūpaṁ.” (Page 575)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rūpika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. rūpa] having shape; neg. a° formless Sdhp.236 (rūp’ârūpika). (Page 575)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rūpin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. rūpa] 1. having material qualities, possessed of form or shape or body or matter, belonging to the realm of form. rūpī is nearly always comb^d & contrasted with arūpī formless, incorporeal (see rūpa D 2 a), cp. combⁿ rūpī arūpī saññī asaññī nevasaññinâsaññī Nd² 617 and similarly It.87=Miln.217. -- D.I,34 (attā dibbo rūpī), 77 (kāyo r. manomayo), 186 (attā etc.), 195 (attapaṭilābho r. manomayo); III,111, 139; M.II,229; S.III,46 (r. arūpī saññī etc.); IV,202, 402; A.II,34; Nd¹ 97, 137; Ps.II,38 (rūpī rūpāni passati); Dhs.635, 1091, 1444; Vbh.123, 342 (read rūpī); Nett 28 (pañc’indriyāni rūpīni), 69 (five rūpīni indriyāni & five arūpīni); DA.I,119 (attā); DhsA.304 (rūpino dhammā); VbhA.511 sq. (attā). -- 2. (-°) having the appearance of, resembling: see rumma°. (Page 575)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rūpinī: {'def': '【阴】美女。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】美女。(p268)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Rūpiya: {'def': '【中】银，银币。 ~maya, 【形】银制的。(p268)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(cp. Sk. rūpya, lit. of splendid appearance, cp. name for gold jātarūpa),【中】银、银币(silver)。Rūpiyamaya(“rajatamaya” PvA.95),【形】银制的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [cp. Sk. rūpya, lit. of splendid appearance, cp. name for gold jātarūpa] silver Vin.III,239 (here collectively for any transactions in “specie,” as expl^d by C. p. 240: rūpiyaṁ nāma satthu-vaṇṇo kahāpaṇo lohamāsako dārumāsako jatumāsako; i. e. copper, wood & lac); S.I,104 (suddhaṁ r.); II,233; Dhs.584.

--maya made of silver Vin.II,112; S.III,144 (sovaṇṇamaya+); Pv.II,6⁴ (where in sequence sovaṇṇa°, maṇi°, loha° r.; expl^d as “rajatamaya” PvA.95); DhA.I,29. (Page 575)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² see ruppa. (Page 575)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rūpārūpavibhāga: {'def': 'm. 色非色分別論 [Buddhadatta作の哲学書].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Rūpī: {'def': '【形】有物质的。(p268)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】有物质的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rūpūpajīvinī: {'def': '【阴】妓女。(p268)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】妓女。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rūta: {'def': 'at J.III,276 read ruta (q. v.). (Page 574)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rūḷa: {'def': '[doubtful spelling; perhaps for rūḷha, evidently identical with rudda, as Trenckner suggests in Notes 63¹⁹] awful, terrible Miln.275 (synonymous with bhīma). (Page 575)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rūḷha: {'def': '² at Miln.217 & 218 is a by-form of ruddha, pp. of rundhati (rumbhati) to obstruct; thus meaning “obstructed, difficult” (of a road, together with lugga palugga). Kern, Toev. s. v. trsl^s (as rūḷha¹) by “overgrown.” (Page 575)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Rūhati的【过分】) 生长，登上，痊愈。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [pp. of rohati; of ruh; Sk. rūḍha] 1. grown Sn.20 (°tiṇa). -- 2. (see rūhati) healed up Miln.291 (°vaṇa one whose wound has healed): cp. rūhanā. (Page 575)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rūḷhi: {'def': '(f.) [fr. rūḷha, pp. of rohati, cp. Sk. rūḍhi] lit. ascent, growth see vi°. -- fig. what has grown by custom, tradition, popular meaning of a word (°sadda). The fig. meaning is the one usually found in Pāli, esp. in Abhidhamma and Commentary literature; e. g. rūḷhiyaṁ by tradition, usually, commonly, VbhA.1 (as category with the 3 other: rāsi, guṇa, paṇṇattQ, rūḷhito id. VbhA.2; rūḷhiyā id. SnA 430; PvA.163; also rūḷhi-vasena VvA.42; or with sadda: rūḷhi-sadda usual meaning Vism.333; DhsA.205; °saddena in popular language, in ordinary speech, customarily, commonly speaking Tikp 253; Vism.310; DA.I,239, 294: SnA 135, 400. (Page 575)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

S: {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第三十个辅音字母。发音好像汉语中的 s。(p308)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第三十个辅音字母。发音好像汉语中的 s。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sa: {'def': '1(= sva 梵文)﹐【形】自己的。(sehi kammehi = 由自己的业)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(= so, ta 的【主、单】), 尤其是【阳】经常用这词形，例： Sa ve kāsāvamarahati。(p308)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '1. (= sva 梵文) 【形】自己的。 (Sehi kammehi = 由自己的业)。 2. saha 在【合】中被弄短的词形，例： sadevaka。(p308)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '3(=saha, identical with saṁ°)接头词︰包括、和(“with,” possessed of, having, same as)。在【合】中被弄短的词形，例：sadevaka包括天神的。svājja =so ajja；svāhaṁ=so ahaṁ；svāyaṁ=so ayaṁ；so maṁ =so imaṁ。sadhammika, 含有法(having common faith); sajāti, 同生(having the same origin). 【反】 a- , nir°。sa-Inda, 与因陀罗(同在)(together with Indra); sa-uttara, 有上 (having something beyond, inferior；【反】anuttara无上)。sa-uttaracchada (& sachadana), 有天篷(a carpet with awnings above it)。sa-udaka, 有水(with water, wet)。sa-udariya, 同胞胎(born from the same womb, cp. Sodariya) sa-uddesa, 有解释(with explanation)。sa-upanisa, 同它的因(together with its cause, causally associated)。sa-upavajja, 有助手(having a helper)。sa-upādāna, 有执取(showing attachment)。sa-upādisesa, 有余(having the substratum of life remaining；【反】anupādisesa无余)。sa-ummi, 有波浪(roaring of the billows)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '2 (cp. Sk. sa (sah), sā) (= so, ta 的【主、单】), 尤其是【阳】经常用这词形，例： Sa ve kāsāvam arahati(他确实值得领受袈裟的)。[sa他(阳.单.主格)] [ve确实] [kāsāvam袈裟(中.单.业格, a.)] [arahati值得领受(单3现)]。base of the Nom. of the demonstr. pron. that, he, she. The form sg. m. sa is rare (e. g. Dh 142; Sn 89).', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [Idg. *so- (m.), *sā- (f.); Nom. sg. to base *to- of the oblique cases; cp. Sk. sa (saḥ), sā; Av. hō, hā; Gr. o(, h(; Goth. sa, sō; Ags. sē “the” (=that one); pe-s=E. thi-s] base of the Nom. of the demonstr. pron. that, he, she. The form sg. m. sa is rare (e. g. Dh.142; Sn.89). According to Geiger (P.Gr. § 105) sa occurs in Sn.40 times, but so 124 times. In later Pāli sa is almost extinct. The final o of so is often changed into v before vowels, and a short vowel is lengthened after this v: svājja Sn.998=so ajja; svāhaṁ J.I,167=so ahaṁ; svāyaṁ Vin.I,2=so ayaṁ. The foll. vowel is dropped in so maṁ It.57=so imaṁ. -- A form se is Māgadhism for nt. Acc. sg. taṁ, found e. g. at D.II,278, 279; M.II,254, 255, and in combⁿ seyyathā, seyyathīdaṁ (for which taṁyathā Miln.1). An idiomatic use is that of so in meaning of “that (he or somebody),” e. g. “so vata . . . palipanno paraṁ palipannaṁ uddharissatī ti: n’etaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati” M.I,45; cp. “sā ‘haṁ dhammaṁ nâssosiṁ” that I did not hear the Dh. Vv 40⁵. Or in the sense of a cond. (or causal) part. “if,” or “once,” e. g. sa kho so bhikkhu . . . upakkileso ti iti viditvā . . . upakkilesaṁ pajahati “once he has recognised . . .” M.I,37. Cp. ya° II.2 b. On correl. use with ya° (yo so etc.) see ya° II.1. (Page 655)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '4 (Vedic sva & svayaṁ (=P. sayaṁ))作反身代名词own (Loc. samhi lohite, Acc. saṁ his own); (saṁ bhātaraṁ); (Acc. san tanuṁ); Instr. sena, on one’s own, by oneself.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '³ [identical with saṁ°] prefix, used as first pt. of compounds, is the sense of “with,” possessed of, having, same as; e. g. sadevaka with the devas Vin.I,8; sadhammika having common faith D.II,273; sajāti having the same origin J.II,108. Often opposed to a- and other neg. prefixes (like nir°). Sometimes almost pleonastical (like sa-antara). -- Of combinations we only mention a few of those in which a vocalic initial of the 2^nd pt. remains uncontracted. Other examples see under their heading in alph. order. E. g. sa-antara inside DhA.III,788 (for santara Dh.315); sa-Inda together with Indra D.II,261, 274; A.V,325 sq.; °-uttara having something beyond, inferior (opp. an°) D.I,80; II,299=M.I,59; Dhs.1292, 1596; DhsA.50; °-uttaracchada (& °chadana) a carpet with awnings above it D.I,7≈; II,187 (°ava); A.I,181; Vin.I,192; DA.I,87; --°udaka with water, wet Vin.I,46; --°udariya born from the same womb, a brother J.IV,417, cp. sodariya; --°uddesa with explanation It.99; Vism.423 (nāma-gotta-vasena sa-udd.; vaṇṇ’ādi-vasena sākāra); --°upanisa together with its cause, causally associated S.II,30; --°upavajja having a helper M.III,266; --°upādāna showing attachment M.II,265; --°upādisesa having the substratum of life remaining Sn.354; It.38; Nett 92. Opp. anupādisesa; --°ummi roaring of the billows It.57, 114. -- Note. sa² & sa³ are differentiations of one and the same sa, which is originally the deictic pronoun in the function of identity & close connection. See etym. under saṁ°. (Page 655)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '5﹐【形】(=sat)真实的。例：sappurisa真人(实人、善人)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '⁴ (reflex. pron.) [Vedic sva & svayaṁ (=P. sayaṁ); Idg. *seǔo, *sǔe; cp. Av. hava & hva own; Gr. e(όs & o(ζ his own; Lat. sui, suus; Goth. swēs own, sik=Ger. sich himself; etc.] own M.I,366; D.II,209; Sn.905; J.II,7; III,164, 323 (Loc. samhi lohite), 402 (Acc. saṁ his own, viz. kinsman; C=sakaṁ janaṁ); IV,249 (saṁ bhātaraṁ); Pv.II,12¹=DhA.III,277 (Acc. san tanuṁ); Instr. sena on one’s own, by oneself J.V,24 (C. not quite to the point: mama santakena). Often in composition, like sadesa one’s own country Dāvs.I,10. Cp. saka. (Page 655)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ the letter s (sa-kāra) SnA 23; or the syllable sa DhA.II,6; PvA.280. (Page 655)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sa-jana: {'def': '【阳】同族者，自己的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】同族者，自己的人。(p312)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sa-upādisesa: {'def': '【形】有残余生机的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】有残余生机的。(p308)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sa-upādisesa-nibbāna: {'def': '有余(依)涅盘', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Sa-upādisesa-nibbānadhātu: {'def': '﹐【阴】有余涅盘界，阿罗汉所体验的涅盘界，虽然一切烦恼已灭尽，但诸蕴还存在。注疏里称为「烦恼之灭尽」(kilesa-parinibbāna)。《如是语经》Itivuttaka：“Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu arahaṁ hoti khīṇāsavo vusitavā katakaraṇīyo ohitabhāro anuppattasadattho parikkhīṇabhavasaṁyojano sammadaññā vimutto. Tassa tiṭṭhanteva pañcindriyāni yesaṁ avighātattā manāpāmanāpaṁ paccanubhoti, sukhadukkhaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti. Tassa yo rāgakkhayo, dosakkhayo, mohakkhayo” ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, sa-upādisesā nibbānadhātu.(於此，诸比丘！阿罗汉比丘已漏尽，住立(梵行)，应作已作，舍重担，达自利(=阿罗汉)，遍尽有结，以正智而解脱。他安住於五根，离伤害事，经验喜与不喜，能感乐与苦，他贪尽、瞋尽、痴尽，诸比丘！这称为有余涅盘界。)《本事经》：「漏尽心解脱，任持最后身，名有余涅盘。」(T4.673a)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sa-upādāna: {'def': '【形】表现执着的。(p308)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】表现执著的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sabala: {'def': '【形】强壮的，有斑点的，杂色的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic śabala (e. g. A. V, 8, 1, 9)=kέrberos, Weber, Ind. Stud. II.297] spotted, variegated Sn.675; Vism.51; VvA.253; name of one of the dogs in the Lokantara hell J.VI,106, 247 (Sabálo ca Sāmo ca). asabala, unspotted D.II,80.

--kārin acting inconsistently A.II,187. (Page 680)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】强壮的，有斑点的，杂色的。(p320)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sabba: {'def': '(梵sarva),【形】所有的(all)，每一的(every)，全部的(whole)，整个的(entire)。【阳】：单.主.sabbo；复.主sabbe；单.呼.sabba﹑sabbā；复.呼sabbe；单.宾.sabbaṁ；复.宾.sabbe；单.具.sabbena；复.具.sabbehi﹑sabbebhi；单.离.sabbasmā﹑sabbamhā；复.离.sabbehi﹑sabbebhi；单.与.﹑属.sabbassa；复.与.﹑属.sabbesaṁ﹑sabbesānaṁ；单.处.sabbasmiṁ﹑sabbamhi)；复.处.sabbesu。【阴】：单.主sabbā；复.主.sabbā﹑sabbāyo；单.呼.sabbe；复.呼sabbāyo；单.宾.sabbaṁ；复.宾.sabbā﹑sabbāyo；单.具.﹑离.sabbāya；复.具.﹑离.sabbāhi﹑sabbābhi；单.与.﹑属.sabbāya﹑sabbassā；复.与.﹑属.sabbāsaṁ﹑sabbāsānaṁ；单.处.sabbāya﹑sabbassā﹑sabbāyaṁ﹑sabbassaṁ；复.处.sabbāsu。【中】：单.主.sabbaṁ；复.主.sabbāni；单.宾.sabbaṁ；复.宾.sabbāni。单.呼.sabba﹑sabbā；复.呼sabbāni 。sabbakanittha,【形】其中最年轻的。sabbakammika,【形】不管部长。sabbaññū, sabbavidū (梵sarvajña),【形】全知的(all-knowing万事通)，古音译：萨云若。【阳】无所不知者(the Ominiscent One一切智者)。sabbaññutā,【阴】无所不知(ominiscence)。sabbaṭṭhaka,【形】每部分都有八个的。sabbanāma,【中】代名词。sabbatthaka,【形】关系到每件事物的，打杂的人。sabbampi, 【无】一切含。Sabbātthasiddha(=Siddhāttha；梵Sarvārthasiddha=Siddhārtha)；one who has completed his task, Miln.214),一切义成(音译：悉达多。佛陀的名字)。sabbapaṭhama,【形】(位置或时间)最先的。sabbapaṭhamaṁ,【副】在全部之前，非常早地。sabbasata,【形】每部分都有一百个的。sabbasovaṇṇa,【形】全是金制的。sabbassa,【中】全部财产。sabbassaharaṇa,【中】没收全部财产。Sabbamatthivāda(梵Sarvāsti-vādin, sarvāstivādin)﹐说一切有部(简称为有部，别名说因部。佛灭后三百年初，自根本之上座部别立者，说一切有部的根本重地乃是在罽宾（迦湿弥罗）地方，)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】所有的，每一的，全部的，整个的。 ~kanittha, 【形】其中最年轻的。 ~kammika, 【形】不管部长。 ~ññū, ~vidū, 【形】都懂的（万事通）。【阳】无所不知者（佛陀）。 ~ññutā,【阴】无所不知。 ~ṭṭhaka,【形】每部分都有八个的。 ~tthaka, 【形】关系到每件事物的，打杂的人。 ~paṭhama, 【形】（位置或时间）最先的。 ~paṭhamaŋ, 【副】在全部之前，非常早地。 ~sata, 【形】每部分都有一百个的。 ~sovaṇṇa,【形】全是金制的。 ~ssa, 【中】全部财产。 ~ssaharaṇa, 【中】没收全部财产。(p321)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Vedic sarva=Av. haurva (complete); Gr. o(λos (“holo-caust”) whole; Lat. solidus & soldus “solid,” perhaps also Lat. salvus safe) whole, entire; all, every D.I,4; S.IV,15; Vin.I,5; It.3; Nd² s. v., Nom. pl. sabbe Sn.66; Gen. pl. sabbesaṁ Sn.1030. -- nt. sabbaṁ the (whole) world of sense-experience S.IV,15, cp. M.I,3. -- At Vism.310 “sabbe” is defined as “anavasesa-pariyādānaṁ.” In compⁿ with superlative expressions sabba° has the meaning of “(best) of all,” quite, very, nothing but, all round; entirely: °bāla the greatest fool D.I,59; °paṭhama the very first, right in front PvA.56; °sovaṇṇa nothing but gold Pv.I,2¹; II,9¹¹; °kaniṭṭha the very youngest PvA.III; °atthaka in every way useful; °saṅgāhika thoroughly comprehensive SnA 304. -- In connection with numerals sabba° has the distributive sense of “of each,” i. e. so & so many things of each kind, like °catukka (with four of each, said of a gift or sacrifice) J.III,44; DhA.III,3; °aṭṭhaka (dāna) (a gift consisting of 8 X 8 things) Miln.291. See detail under aṭṭha B 1. a. -- °soḷasaka (of 16 each) DhA.III,3; °sata (of 100 each) DhA.II,6. -- Cases adverbially: Instr. sabbena sabbaṁ altogether all, i. e. with everything [cp. BSk. sarvena sarvaṁ Divy 39, 144, 270; 502] D.II,57; PvA.130; 131. -- Abl. sabbato “all round,” in every respect Pv.I,11¹; J.VI,76; & sabbaso altogether, throughout D.I,34; Sn.288; Dh.265; PvA.119; Nd¹ 421; DhA.IV,100. -- Derivations: 1. sabbattha everywhere, under all circumstances S.I,134; Dh.83; Sn.269; Nd 133; PvA.1, 18, 107; VbhA.372 sq. °kaṁ everywhere J.I,15, 176, 172; Dāṭh.V,57. -- 2. sabbathā in every way; sabbathā sabbaṁ completely D.II,57; S.IV,167. -- 3. sabbadā always Sn.174, 197, 536; Dh.202; Pv.I,9¹ (=sabbakālaṁ C.); I,10¹⁴ (id.). sabbadā-cana always It.36. -- 4. sabbadhi (fr. Sk. *sarvadha=vic̦vadha, Weber, Ind. Str. III,392) everywhere, in every respect D.I,251; II,186; Sn.176; Dh.90; also sabbadhī Sn.952, 1034; Vin.I,38; VbhA.377; Vism.308 (=sabbattha); Nd¹ 441, 443. --atthaka concerned with everything, a do-all J.II,30; 74; DhA.II,151 (mahāmatta). -- profitable to all Miln.373 (T. ṭṭh). of kammaṭṭhāna SnA.II,54; Vism.97. --atthika always useful Miln.153. --âbhibhū conquering all Sn.211; Vin.I,8. --otuka corresponding to all the seasons D.II,179; Pv IV.12²; Sdhp.248. --kammika (amacca) (a minister) doing all work Vism.130. --kālaṁ always: see sadā. --ghasa all-devouring J.I,288. --ji all-conquering S.IV,83. --(ñ)jaha abandoning everything S.II,284; Sn.211; Dh.353=Vin.I,8. --ññu omniscient M.I,482; II,31, 126; A.I,220; Miln.74; VbhA.50; SnA 229, 424, 585; J.I,214; 335; °tā (f.) omniscience Pug.14; 70; J.I,2, 14; Nett 61, 103; also written sabbaññūtā; sabbaññutā-ñāṇa (nt.) omniscience Nett 103; DA.I,99; VbhA.197. Also written sabbaññū°, thus J.I,75; --dassāvin one who sees (i.e. knows) everything M.I,92. --byohāra business, intercourse Ud.65; see saṁvohāra. --bhumma universal monarch J.VI,45. --vidū all wise Sn.177, 211; Vin.I,8; Dh.353. --saṁharaka a kind of perfume “eau de mille fleurs” J.VI,336. --sādhāraṇa common to all J.I,301 sq. (Page 680)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sabbadhi: {'def': '【副】各处，到处。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【副】各处，到处。(p321)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sabbadā: {'def': '【副】总是(always)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【副】总是，每天。(p321)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sabbakāmi: {'def': 'm. 一切去, 薩婆迦眉[第二結集比丘. 十事を非法どする. 当時の最長老]', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Sabbaso: {'def': '【副】全部，在每方面。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【副】全部，在每方面。(p321)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sabbassa: {'def': '(nt.) [sarvasva] the whole of one’s property J.III,105; V,100 (read: sabbasaṁ vā pan’assa haranti); °-haraṇa (nt.) confiscation of one’s property J.III,105; V,246 (v. l.); sabbassaharaṇadaṇḍa (m.) the same J.IV,204 (so read instead of sabbappaharaṇa). At some passages sabba (nt.) “all,” seems to be used in the same sense, esp. Gen. sabbassa-e. g. J.III,50; IV,19; V,324. (Page 681)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sabbathā: {'def': '【副】在每一方面。(p321)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【副】在每一方面(in every way)。sabbathā sabbaṁ, 完全地(completely)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sabbato: {'def': '【无】到处，在各方面，全部。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【无】到处，在各方面，全部。(p321)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sabbattha: {'def': 'sabbatra, 【副】各处，到处。(p321)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'sabbatra,【副】各处，到处，在所有状况下。S.46.53./V,115.︰Satiñca khvāhaṁ, bhikkhave, sabbatthikaṁ vadāmī”ti.(诸比丘！至於念(觉支)，我说：‘念’用在各处)。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sabbatthatā: {'def': 'the state of being everywhere; sabbatthatāya on the whole D.I,251; II,187; M.I,38; S.IV,296; A.III,225; V,299, 344. Expl^d at Vism.308 (with tt). (Page 681)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sabbatthi-vāda: {'def': 'm. [Sk. Sarvāstivāda] 説一切有部[部派]', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Sabbaññutāñāṇa: {'def': '﹐【阳】一切知智(佛陀的智慧)。『一时知一切、一时见一切。』(大) 1,793c；M.90./II,127作︰“sakideva sabbaññassati sabbaṁ dakkhīti.(只一度即将知一切、将见一切。)”《注释书》：『一时』‘sakideva’指‘ekāvajanena(从意界只以一转向到见等前五识或第六意识)ekacittena(以一心思推度或确定)ekajavanena(以一速行)’；『一切』‘sabbaṁ’指‘atītānāgatapaccuppannaṁ’(过去、未来、现在(三世一切内外、身心、事理等)) MA.III,357f.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sabbha: {'def': 'see a°. (Page 681)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sabbhi: {'def': '(梵文 = sadbhih, 与智者。但是在巴利文中，有时被当做【形】) 品德高尚的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(梵文 = sadbhih, 与智者。但是在巴利文中，有时被当做【形】) 品德高尚的。(p321)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sabbhin: {'def': 'see a°. (Page 681)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sabbāvant: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. BSk. sarvāvant Divy 294, 298, 352] all, entire D.I,73, 251; III,224; A.III,27; V,299 sq., 344 sq. (Page 681)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sabhaggata: {'def': '【形】想起集会的。(p321)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [sabhā+gata] gone to the hall of assembly A.I,128; Sn.397; Pug.29. (Page 681)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'Sabhāgata(sabhā+gata),【形】到集会所的(gone to the hall of assembly)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sabhoga: {'def': '1 (sa3+bhoga)﹐【形】富裕的(wealthy)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [sa⁴+bhoga] property, possession Miln.139. (Page 681)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '2 (sa4+bhoga)﹐财产(property, possession)。sābhoga 有功用', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ (adj.) [sa³+bhoga] wealthy D.I,73. (Page 681)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sabhojana: {'def': '(adj.-nt.) [sa³+bhojana] sharing food (?) Vin.IV,95; Sn.102. (Page 681)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】 (sa + bhojana), 有食物的，(sa + ubho + jana), 有一对人的（即：夫妇）。〔第二个，在戒律中寻到〕。(p321)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】(sa3+bhojana), 有食物的，(sa+ubho+jana), 有一对人的(即：夫妇)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sabhā: {'def': '(Vedic sabhā),【阴】会议厅(council a hall, assemblyroom, a public rest-house, hostelry)。sudhamma-sabhā﹐正法殿、善法堂，为帝释天之宫殿。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】集会，会议厅。(p321)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [Vedic sabhā, cp. K.Z. IV.370] 1. a hall, assemblyroom D.II,274; A.I,143; S.I,176; J.I,119; 157, 204. ‹-› 2. a public rest-house, hostelry J.I,302. dhamma° chapel J.VI,333.

--gata=sabhaggata S.V,394; M.I,286. (Page 681)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sabhāga: {'def': '(adj.) [sa²+bhāga] common, being of the same division Vin.II,75; like, equal, similar Miln.79; s. āpatti a common offence, shared by all Vin.I,126 sq.; vīthisabhāgena in street company, the whole street in common J.II,45; opp. visabhāga unusual J.I,303; different Vism.516; Miln.79.

--ṭṭhāna a common room, a suitable or convenient place J.I,426; III,49; V,235. --vuttin living in mutual courtesy, properly, suitably Vin.I,45; J.I,219; a-sabhāgavuttin J.I,218; sabhāgavuttika Vin.II,162; A.III,14 sq.; a-sabhāgavuttika ibid. (Page 681)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(sa2+bhāga),【形】通常的，同一个区的(common, being of the same division)。sabhāgaṭṭhāna,【中】方便的地方(a common room, a suitable or convenient place)。sabhāgavuttī,【形】相互礼貌往来的，礼尚往来的(living in mutual courtesy, properly, suitably)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】通常的，同一个区的。 ~ṭṭhāna, 【中】方便的地方。 ~vuttī,【形】相互礼貌来往的。(p321)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sabhājana: {'def': '(Dhtp 553: pīti-dassanesu)﹐尊敬，礼敬(honouring, salutation)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Dhtp 553: pīti-dassanesu] honouring, salutation Miln.2. (Page 681)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sabhāva: {'def': '【阳】自然，情况，性情，真实。 ~dhamma, 【阳】自然的原则。(p321)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[sa⁴+bhāva] 1. state (of mind), nature, condition Miln.90, 212, 360; PvA.39 (ummattaka°), 98 (santa°), 219. -- 2. character, disposition, behaviour PvA.13, 35 (ullumpana°), 220 (lokiya°). -- 3. truth, reality, sincerity Miln.164; J.V,459; V,198 (opp. musāvāda); J.VI,469; sabhāvaṁ sincerely, devotedly J.VI,486.

--dhamma principle of nature J.I,214; --dhammatta= °dhamma Vism.238. --bhūta true J.III,20. (Page 681)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】自性，情况，性情，真实。sabhāvadhamma,【阳】自然的原则。sabhāvarūpa，有自性色--具有各自的特性，例如地界的硬等。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sabhāva-dhamma: {'def': '自性法;第一义的存在(PS: ›sabhāva-dhamma自性;实相)', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Sabhāya: {'def': '(=sabhā)﹐【中】会议厅。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.)=sabhā Vin.III,200. (Page 681)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sabrahmacarin: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [sa³+brahmacārin] a fellow student D.II,77; III,241 sq., 245; M.I,101; A.II,97; Sn.973; VbhA.281. (Page 681)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sabrahmacārī: {'def': '(sa3+brahmacārin),【阳】出家同伴(同修)(a fellow student)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】出家同伴（同修）。(p321)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sabrahmaka: {'def': '【形】包括梵天世界。(p321)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】包括梵天世界。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+brahma+ka] including the Brahma world D.I,62; III,76, 135; A.I,260; II,70; S.V,423; Vin.I,11; DA.I,174. (Page 681)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sacca: {'def': '【中】事实，谛。【形】真实的，真正的。 ~kiriyā, 【阴】在誓约上的公告。 ~paṭivedha, ~abhisamaya, 【阳】真实的理解。 ~vācā, 【阴】诚实的话。 ~vādī, 【阳】说实话的人。 ~sandha, 【形】可靠的。(p312)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '谛;真理', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '【中】事实，谛。【形】真实的，真正的。saccakiriyā(=saccavacana),【阴】真实语。saccapaṭivedha, saccabhisamaya,【阳】真实的理解。saccavācā,【阴】诚实的话。saccavādī,【阳】说实话的人。saccasandha,【形】可靠的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Sk. satya] real, true D.I,182; M.II,169; III,207; Dh.408; nt. saccaṁ truly, verily, certainly Miln.120; saccaṁ kira is it really true? D.I,113; Vin.I,45, 60; J.I,107; saccato truly S.III,112. -- (nt. as noun) saccaṁ the truth A.II,25, 115 (parama°); Dh.393; also: a solemn asseveration Mhvs 25, 18. Sacce patiṭṭhāya keeping to fact, M.I,376. -- pl. (cattāri) saccāni the (four) truths M.II,199; A.II,41, 176; Sn.883 sq.; Dhs.358. -- The 4 ariya-saccāni are the truth about dukkha, dukkhasamudaya, dukkha-nirodha, and dukkha-nirodha-gāminipaṭipadā. Thus e. g. at Vin.I,230; D.II,304 sq.; III,277; A.I,175 sq.; Vism.494 sq.; VbhA.116 sq., 141 sq. A shortened statement as dukkha, samudaya, nirodha, magga is freq. found, e. g. Vin.I,16; see under dukkha B. 1. -- See also ariyasacca & asacca. -- iminā saccena in consequence of this truth, i. e. if this be true J.I,294.

--avhaya deserving his name, Cp. of the Buddha Sn.1133, cp. Nd² 624. --âdhitthāna determined on truth M.III,245; D.III,229. --ânupaṭṭi realization of truth M.II,173 sq. --ânubodha awakening to truth M.II,171 sq. --ânurakkhaṇa warding of truth, M.II,176. --âbhinivesa inclination to dogmatize, one of the kāya-ganthas S.V,59; Dhs.1139; DhsA.377. --âbhisamaya comprehension of the truth Sn.758; Th.1, 338; ThA.239. --kāra ratification, pledge, payment in advance as guarantee J.I,121. --kiriyā a solemn declaration, a declaration on oath J.I,214, 294; IV,31, 142; V,94; Miln.120; Mhvs 18, 39 (see trslⁿ p. 125 on term). --ñāṇa knowledge of the truth Vism.510; DhA.IV,152. --nāma doing justice to one’s name, bearing a true name, Ep. of the Buddha A.III,346; IV,285, 289; PvA.231. --nikkhama truthful Sn.542. --paṭivedha penetration of the truth Ps.II,57. --vaṅka a certain kind of fish J.V,405 (the Copenhagen MS. has [sa]sacca-vaṅka, which has been given by Fausböll as sata-vaṅka). --vacana (1) veracity M.I,403; Dh.I,160; (2)=saccakiriyā KhA 169, 180. --vajja truthfulness D.I,53; S.IV,349; J.IV,320. --vācā id. A.II,228; III,244; J.I,201. --vādin truthful, speaking the truth D.I,4; III,170; A.II,209; IV,249, 389; S.I,66; Sn.59; Dh.217; Miln.120; Nd² 623; DhA.III,288. --vivaṭṭa revelation of truth Ps.I,11. --sandha truthful, reliable D.I,4; III,170; A.II,209; IV,249; DA.I,73. --sammatā popular truth, maxim S.IV,230. (Page 668)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sacca-saṅkhepa: {'def': 'm. 諦要略論 [Cūḷa-Dhammapāla 作の哲学書].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Saccakāra: {'def': '【阳】保证，批准，预先付款。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】保证，批准，预先付款。(p312)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sacceti: {'def': 'in fut. saccessati at A.IV,343 is most likely an old mistake for ghaṭṭessati is the same passage at A.III,343; the meaning is “to touch,” or to approach, disturb. It is hardly=saśc “to accompany.” (Page 668)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sacchanda: {'def': '(adj.) [sa⁴+chanda] self-willed, headstrong J.I,421; as sacchandin ibid. (Page 668)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sacchavīni: {'def': '(mūlāni) at A.III,371 (opp. ummūla) means “roots taking to the soil again.” It is doubtful whether it belongs to chavi “skin.” (Page 668)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sacchikaraṇa: {'def': '【中】实现，经历。 ~raṇīya, 【形】适合被实现的。(p312)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】实现，经历。sacchikaraṇīya,【形】适合被实现的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sacchikaraṇīya: {'def': '(adj.) [grd: of sacchikaroti] (able) to be realized S.III,223 sq.; D.III,230=A.II,182 (in four ways: by kāya, sati, cakkhu, paññā). (Page 668)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sacchikaroti: {'def': '[cp. Sk. sākṣāt kṛ; the P. form being *saccha° (=sa³+akṣ, as in akkhi), with change of °a to °i before kṛ. See also sakkhiṁ karoti] to see with one’s eyes, to realize, to experience for oneself. Pres. °karoti D.I,229; S.IV,337; V,11, 49. -- Fut. °karissati S.V,10; M.II,201 (as sacchi vā k.). -- Aor. sacch’âkāsi S.IV,63; SnA 166. -- Grd. °kātabba Vin.I,11; S.V,422; & °karaṇīya (q. v.). -- pp. sacchikata. (Page 668)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(sacchi+kar行+o), 实现，亲自经历。【过】sacchikari。【现分】sacchikaronta。【义】sacchikātabba。【独】sacchikatvā, sacchikaritvā。【不】sacchikātuṁ, sacchikarituṁ。sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedeti﹐自身作证，为他人说(自己以通智来体验，并将体验告诉他人)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(sacchi + kar + o), 实现，亲自经历。【过】 ~kari。【现分】~karonta。【潜】 ~kātabba。【独】 ~katvā, ~karitvā。【不】 ~kātuŋ,~karituŋ。(p312)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sacchikata: {'def': '(Sacchikaroti的【过分】) 实现，亲自经历，作证，现证。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of sacchikaroti cp. BSk. sākṣātkṛtaḥ AvŚ I.210] seen with one’s own eyes, realized, experienced D.I,250; S.V,422=Vin.I,11; DhA.IV,117. (Page 668)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sacchikiriyā: {'def': '【阴】参考 Sacchikaraṇa。(p312)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. sacchikaroti] realization, experiencing oath, ordeal, confirmation D.I,100 (etc.). D.I,100; III,255; S.IV,254; A.I,22; II,148; III,101; IV,332 sq.; Sn.267; Vism.696 sq.; Dhs.296; DhA.IV,63. (Page 668)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(梵sāksāt-kriyā),【阴】作证，现证。参考 Sacchikaraṇa。Vism.697.︰Paṭhamamaggakkhaṇe pana nibbānadassanaṁ ‘dassanasacchikiriyā’. Sesamaggakkhaṇesu ‘bhāvanāsacchikiriyā’ti.(於初道的刹那见涅盘为「见证」。於其余诸道的刹那(证涅盘)为「修证」。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saccika: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Sk. satyaka] real, true Miln.226 (the same passage at Ps.I,174 & Nd¹ 458 spells sacchika). ‹-› saccik’aṭṭha truth, reality, the highest truth Kvu 1 sq.; DhsA.4 (nearly=paramaṭṭha); KhA 102. Kern in a phantastic interpretation (Toev. II.49, 50) takes it as sacci-kaṭṭha (=Sk. sāci-kṛṣta) “pulled sideways,” i. e. “misunderstood.” (Page 668)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saccālika: {'def': '扭曲事实(distortion of truth, falsehood S.IV,306.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saccāpeti: {'def': '(sacca 的【派】), 誓约所约束，恳求。【过】saccāpesi。【过分】saccāpita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(sacca 的【派】), 誓约所约束，恳求。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~pita。(p312)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'at A.IV,346=Vin.II,19 is probably misreading or an old misspelling for sajjāpeti fr. sajjeti, the confusion sac: saj being frequent. Meaning: to undertake, fulfil, realize. (Page 668)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sace: {'def': '【无】如果。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(conj.) [sa²+ce; cp. sacāca] if D.I,8, 51; Vin.I,7; Dh.134; J.I,311. -- sace . . . noce if . . . if not J.VI,365. (Page 667)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【无】如果。(p312)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sacetana: {'def': '【形】生气勃勃的，有意识的。(p312)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+cetana] animate, conscious, rational J.I,74; Mhvs 38, 97. (Page 667)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】生气勃勃的，有意识的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sacetasa: {'def': '(sa有+cetasa心)﹐【形】有心的，思虑深的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+cetasa] attentive, thoughtful A.I,254 (=citta-sampanna C.). (Page 667)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sacitta: {'def': '¹ (nt.) [sa⁴+citta] one’s own mind or heart D.II,120; Dh.183, 327=Miln.379. (Page 667)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (adj.) [sa²+citta] of the same mind J.V,360. (Page 667)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】自己的心。sacittaka,【形】自心的，具有心的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】自己的心。 ~ka, 【形】具有心的。(p312)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sacittaka: {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+citta+ka] endowed with mind, intelligent DhsA.295. (Page 667)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sacāca: {'def': '(conj.) if indeed Vin.I,88; see sace. (Page 667)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sadana: {'def': '【中】房子。(p316)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】房子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sadara: {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+dara] fearful, unhappy A.II,172; M.I,280, 465=D.III,57 (reads dd). (Page 674)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】麻烦的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】麻烦的。(p316)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sadasa: {'def': '【形】有边缘的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[sa+dasā] a squatting mat with a fringe Vin.IV,171. (Page 674)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】有边缘的。(p316)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sadassa: {'def': '【阳】良马。(p316)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】良马。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[sat(=sant)+assa] a horse of good breed A.I,289. (Page 674)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sadattha: {'def': '[sat (=sant)+attha] the highest good, ideal D.II,141; M.I,4; A.V,207 sq.; Dh.166; Mhvs 3, 24. It may be taken as sa⁴+attha (with euphonic-d-), i. e. one’s own good, as it is expl^d by Bdhgh at DhA.III,160 (“sake atthe”), & adopted in trslⁿ at Dial. II.154. (Page 674)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】自己的福利。(p316)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(sa自+d+attha意义),【阳】自己的福利，直译：自义。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sadatthuta: {'def': '(adj.) [sadā+thuta] always praised J.IV,101 (=nicca-pasattha C.). (Page 674)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sadda: {'def': '【阳】声，噪音，话。 ~ttha, 【阳】话的意义。 ~vidū, 懂得各种不同声音的意义的人。 ~vedhī, 【阳】听声音射击的人。 ~sattha, 【中】语法，语文学。(p316)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. late Vedic śabda; BSk. śabda as nt. at AvŚ I.3] 1. sound, noise D.I,79, 152; III, 102 sq., 146, 234, 244 sq., 269, 281; M.III,56, 267; A.III,30 sq.; IV,91, 248; J.I,3 (ten sounds); Sn.71; Vism.408 (var. kinds); Dhs.621 (udaka°); DhA.II,7 (udrīyana°); def^d at Vism.446 (“sota-paṭihanana-lakkhaṇa,” etc.) & at VbhA.45 (“sappatī ti saddo, udāhariyatī ti attho”). -- 2. voice J.II,108. -- 3. word Vin.I,11; It.114; DhA.I,15 (itthi°); VbhA.387 (in nirutti); SnA 261, 318, 335.

--kovida a grammarian or phonetician SnA 321. --dhātu element of sound Dhs.707. --naya science of grammar, etymology KhA 107. --bheda word analysis Vism.519 sq. --vidū a grammarian SnA 169. --vedhin shooting by sound Mhvs 23, 85. --sattha science of words, grammar SnA 266. --siddhi analysis or correct formation of a word, grammatical explanation SnA 304, 551. (Page 674)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】声，噪音，话。saddattha,【阳】话的意义。saddavidū, 懂得各种不同声音的意义的人。saddavedhī,【阳】听声音射击的人。saddasattha,【中】语法，语文学。saddārammaṇa, 【中】声所缘(=声)。 1hatthisaddena 2assasaddena 3rathasaddena 4bherisaddena 5mudiṅgasaddena 6vīṇāsaddena 7gītasaddena 8saṅkhasaddena 9sammasaddena 10pāṇitāḷasaddena ‘asnātha pivatha khādathā’ti dasamena saddena.(1象声、2马声、3车声、4大鼓声(薄洛鼓声)、5杖鼓声(伎鼓声)、6琵琶声、7歌声、8吹螺声、9铙钹声及10第十「吃！饮！嚼！」声。)(D.17./II,170.)《中阿含67经》说十二种声，少掉‘铙钹声’，多出「步声、舞声、惠施声」。(T1.516.1) saddakaṇṭakā kho pana jhānā vuttā Bhagavatā,世尊曾说音声为禅定的刺(障碍)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saddahana: {'def': '【中】 ~nā, 【阴】有坚定的宗教信仰，信任。(p316)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】saddahanā,【阴】有坚定的宗教信仰，信任。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saddahanā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. sad+dhā] believing, trusting, having faith Nd² 632; Dhs.12, 25; Nett 15, 19; DhA.I,76. (Page 675)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saddahati: {'def': '(saṁ+dhā+a), 相信，有信心。【过】saddadahi。【过分】saddahita。【现分】saddahanta。【独】saddahitvā。【义】saddahitabba。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + dhā + a), 相信，有信心。【过】 ~dahi。【过分】 ~dahita。【现分】 ~hanta。【独】 ~hitvā。【潜】 ~hitabba。(p316)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Vedic śrad-dhā, only in impers. forms grd. śrad-dadhāna; pp. śrad-dhita; inf. śrad-dhā; cp. Av. ƶraƶ-dā id.; Lat. cred-(d)o (cp. “creed”); Oir. cretim to believe. Fr. Idg. *kred (=cord° heart)+*dhe, lit. to put one’s heart on] to believe, to have faith D.II,115; 244; S.III,225; Pv.II,8³; J.V,480; DhA.II,27. ppr saddahanto DA.I,81; PvA.148 (a°), 151 (a°), 285; & saddahāna S.I,20, 214; Sn.186; It.112. Pot. saddheyya J.II,446 (=saddaheyya C.); 2^nd pl. saddahetha J.III,192; 3^rd pl. saddheyyuṁ S.II,255. At J.VI,575 (Pot.) saddahe seems to be used as an exclamation in the sense of “I wonder” (cp. maññe). --saddahase at Pv IV.8¹ is to be read saddāyase (see saddāyati). -- grd. saddhātabba J.II,37; V,480; PvA.217; saddahātabba D.II,346; saddahitabba Miln.310; saddheyya Vin.III,188; and saddhāyitabba (Caus.!) PvA.109. A Caus. aor. 2 sg. is (mā) . . . saddahesi J.VI,136¹⁴⁰ -- ger. saddhāya J.V,176 (=saddahitvā C.); inf. saddhātuṁ J.V,445. ‹-› pp. (Caus.) saddhāyita. -- Caus. II. saddahāpeti to make believe, to convince; Pot. °dahāpeyya J.VI,575; Pv IV.1²⁵; fut. °dahāpessati J.I,294. (Page 674)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saddahāna: {'def': '【阳】相信的人。(p316)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】相信的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saddala: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Sk. śādvala] grassy Th.1, 211; J.I,87; VI, 518; Miln.286; Pv.II,12¹⁰ (=taruṇa-tiṇa PvA.158). (Page 674)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】布满新草的地方。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】布满新草的地方。(p316)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saddana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. śabd: see saddāyati] making a noise Dhtm 401. (Page 674)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saddha: {'def': '【形】有信仰的，忠实的，投入的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '信、信心。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}; {'def': '¹ (adj.) [orig. adj. of saddha², but felt to be adj. of saddhā; cp. BSk. śrāddha AvŚ I.83, 383] 1. believing faithful D.I,171; S.I,43; II,159 sq.; A.I,150; II,164, 227 sq.; III,3 sq., 34, 182; IV,38, 145, 314 sq.; V,10 sq., 124 sq.; Sn.188, 371; Dh. 8; Pv.I,10⁴; IV,1⁸⁶; DhA.II,82. --as(s)addha unbelieving PvA.42, 54, 67, 243 & passim (see a°). -- 2. credulous Sn.853; Dh.97. (Page 675)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [cp. Epic Sk. & Sūtra literature śrāddha, fr. śrad-dhā] a funeral rite in honour of departed relatives connected with meals and gifts to the brahmins D.I,97; A.I,166; V,269, 273; DA.I,267; saddhaṁ pamuñcati to give up offerings, to abandon Brahmanism Vin.I,7; D.II,39; Sn.1146. The word is n. according to Abhp and A.V,269--273; Loc. °e, D.I,97; J.II,360; kaṁ saddhaṁ (Acc. in a gāthā), seems to be f.; Com. ib. 360 has saddhā-bhattaṁ, a funeral repast (v. l. saddha-°). Thus it seems to be confused with saddhā. (Page 675)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】有信仰的，忠实的，投入的。(p316)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saddhamma: {'def': '【阳】正法，真实的教义。(p316)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[sad(=sant)+dhamma, cp. BSk. saddharma, e. g. Jtm 224] the true dhamma, the best religion, good practice, the “doctrine of the good” (so Geiger, Pali Dhamma pp. 53, 54, q. v. for detailed discussion of the term) M.I,46; S.V,172 sq.; A.I,69; III,7 sq., 174 sq., 435 sq.; V,169, 317; Sn.1020; Dh.38; J.V,483; DhA.IV,95. Seven saddhammas: M.I,354, 356; D.III,252, 282; A.IV,108 sq. -- Opp. a-saddhamma (q. v.); four a°: A.II,47; eight: Vin.II,202.

--garu paying homage to the true religion S.I,140. --savana hearing the (preaching of the) true dhamma D.III,227, 274; A.I,279; II,245; IV,25 sq., 221; V,115 sq. (Page 675)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+dhamma),【阳】正法(the Sublime Doctrine)，真实的教义，规矩(台语︰法度)。saddhammasenā Sugatānugo yo﹐善逝的追随者--那正法的军队。saddhammaṭṭhitiyā, 为了正法久住。善见律(Sp.I,225-6.；CS:Pārā.pg.1.189-190)︰Saddhammaṭṭhitiyāti tividho saddhammo--pariyattisaddhammo, paṭipattisaddhammo, adhigamasaddhammoti. Tattha Piṭakattayasaṅgahitaṁ sabbampi Buddhavacanaṁ “Pariyattisaddhammo” nāma. 1Terasa dhutaguṇā, 2cuddasa khandhakavattāni, 3dve-asīti mahāvattāni, sīlasamādhivipassanāti ayaṁ “Paṭipattisaddhammo” nāma. Cattāro ariyamaggā cattāri ca sāmaññaphalāni nibbānañcāti ayaṁ “Adhigamasaddhammo” nāma. So sabbopi yasmā sikkhāpadapaññattiyā sati bhikkhū sikkhāpadañca tassa vibhaṅgañca tadatthajotanatthaṁ aññañca Buddhavacanaṁ pariyāpuṇanti, yathāpaññattañca paṭipajjamānā paṭipattiṁ pūretvā paṭipattiyā adhigantabbaṁ lokuttaradhammaṁ adhigacchanti, tasmā sikkhāpadapaññattiyā ciraṭṭhitiko hoti. Tena vuttaṁ--“Saddhammaṭṭhitiyā”ti.(令正法久住者，正法有三种，何谓为三？一者学正法(pariyattisaddhammo教法)久住，二者信受正法(paṭipattisaddhammo行正法)久住，三者得道正法(adhigamasaddhammo证道)久住。)问曰：「何谓学正法久住？」答曰：「学三藏一切久住佛所说，是名正法，於三藏中1十二头陀(Terasa dhutaguṇā十三头陀)、2十四威仪、3八十二大威仪戒、禅定、三昧(vipassanā毘婆舍那)，是名信受正法久住。四沙门道果及涅盘者，是名得道正法久住。如来结戒故，令比丘随顺，若随顺者，具足而得圣利，是故学为初正法久住。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saddhamma-pajjotikā: {'def': 'f. 義釈の註釈書 NdA.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Saddhamma-pakāsinī: {'def': 'f. 無碍解道の註書. PṭmA.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Saddhamma-patirūpaka: {'def': '【阳】像法(相似佛法)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saddhamma-saṅgaha: {'def': 'm. 摂妙法 [14世紀の Dhammakitti 作のパ一リ書].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Saddhivihārika: {'def': 'saddhivihārī, 【阳】同居，护理比丘。(p316)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'saddhivihārī,【阳】同住，同居，护理比丘。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saddhiya: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. *śraddhya] only in neg. a° (q. v.). (Page 675)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saddhiŋ: {'def': '【无】一起。 ~cara, 【形】朋友，从者。(p316)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saddhiṁ: {'def': '【无】一起(台语：同齐tang5 ce5、三佮sann kap、斗阵tau3 tin7、做一下co3 cit8 e7)。saddhicara,【形】朋友，从者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(& saddhi°) (adv.) [in form=Vedic sadhrīṁ “towards one aim,” but in meaning=Vedic sadhryak (opp. viṣvak, cp. P. visuṁ) “together.” Cp. also Vedic saṁyak=P. sammā. The BSk. is sārdhaṁ, e. g. s. vihārin AvŚ II.139] together; as prep. (following the noun): in company with (Instr.) D.I,31; Vin.I,32; III,188 (expl^d as “ekato”); J.I,189; II,273; DA.I,35; Miln.23; also with Loc. DA.I,15; or Gen. Vin.II,154; J.I,420. As adv. saddhiṁ agamāsi J.I,154, cp. saddhiṁkīḷita J.II,20.

--cara companion Sn.45, 46 (=ekato cara Nd² 633); Dh.328. --vihārika (saddhi°) co-resident, fellow-bhikkhu; pupil Vin.I,45 sq.; A.III,70; J.I,182, 224; Vism.94; DhA.II,19. --vihārin id. A.II,239; III,69; J.I,1; f. °vihārinī Vin.IV,291. (Page 675)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saddhā: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Vedic śraddhā: see saddahati] faith (on term cp. Geiger, Saṁyutta trslⁿ II.45²) D.I,63; III,164 sq.; S.I,172=Sn.76; S.V,196; Dh.144; A.I,150, 210; III,4 sq., 352; IV,23; V,96; Dhs.12; Miln.34 sq.; Tikp 61, 166, 277, 282. -- Instr. saddhāya (used as adv.) in faith, by faith in (Acc. or Gen.) Vin.II,289 (āyasmantānaṁ); J.V,176 (pabbajita); PvA.49 (kammaphalaṁ s.); or shortened to saddhā (-pabbajita) M.I,123; A.I,24; J.I,130. The same phrase as saddhāya pabbajita at S.I,120 is expl^d as “saddahitvā” by Bdhgh (see K.S. I.321), thus taking it as ger.

--ânusārin walking according to faith M.I,479; A.I,74; Pug.15; Nett 112, 189. --indriya (saddh°) the faculty, i. e. the moral sense, of faith D.III,239, 278; A.II,149; S.V,193, 377; Dhs.12, 62, 75; Nett 19. --cariyā living in faith Vism.101. --deyya a gift in faith D.I,5; Vin.I,298; IV,30; DA.I,81. --vimutta emancipated through faith M.I,478; A.I,74, 118 sq.; Pug.15; Nett 190. --vimutti emancipation through faith Pug.15. (Page 675)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '信(PS: saddha --信者)', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '(saṁ+dah建立、放置),【阴】信心，热爱。saddhātabba,【义】应该相信。saddhādeyya,【形】信施(信心的礼物)。saddhādhana,【中】信财(信心的财富)。saddhāyika,【形】可信赖的。saddhālū,【形】很投入的。S.1.73./I,42.S.10.12.(=Sn.v.182.)︰Saddhīdha vittaṁ purisassa seṭṭhaṁ(在这世上，信仰是人的最宝贵的财富。|S.10.12.(=Sn.v.184.)︰Saddhā tarati oghaṁ (凭信仰渡过水流)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】信心，热爱。 ~tabba, 【潜】应该相信。 ~deyya, 【形】信施（信心的礼物）。 ~dhana, 【中】信财（信心的财富）。 ~yika, 【形】可信赖的。 ~lū, 【形】很投入的。(p316)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saddhātar: {'def': '[n. ag. fr. saddahati, i. e. sad+dhātar] a believer Sdhp.39. (Page 675)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saddhāyika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. saddhāya, ger. of saddahati] trustworthy D.II,320; A.IV,109 (so read for °sika); Th.2, 43, 69. (Page 675)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saddhāyita: {'def': '[pp. of saddahati; BSk. śraddhayita] one who is trusted; nt. that which is believed, faith Pv.II,8⁵ May be misspelling for saddhāyika. (Page 675)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saddita: {'def': '[pp. of śabd; cp. saddāyati] sounded, called Sdhp.100. (Page 675)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saddāyati: {'def': '(sadda 的【派】), 发出噪音，呼喊。【过】saddāyi。【独】saddāyitvā。【现分】saddāyamāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[denom. fr. sadda; i. e. śabd] cp. Epic Sk. śabdayati & śabdāyati] 1. to make a sound Miln.258; Pv IV.8¹ (saddāyase read for saddahase); IV,16¹ (id.); Ud.61 (°āyamāna noisy).- 2. to call, summon (with Acc.) J.III,288. (Page 675)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(sadda 的【派】), 发出噪音，呼喊。【过】 ~dāyi。【独】 ~dāyitvā。【现分】 ~yamāna。(p316)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saddūla: {'def': '【阳】豹(leopard)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. śārdūla] a leopard Miln.23. (Page 675)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】豹。(p316)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Saderita: {'def': ' see saterita. (Page 674)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sadevaka: {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+deva+ka] together with the devas, with the deva world D.I,62; III,76, 135; Sn.86; Vin.I,8, 11; Dh.44; DA.I,174. At J.I,14 sadevake (Loc.) is used in the sense of “in the world of men & gods.” (Page 674)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】包括天神的。(p316)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】包括天神的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sadevika: {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+devī+ka] together with his queen Mhvs 33, 70. (Page 674)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sadhamma: {'def': '[sa⁴+dhamma] one’s own religion or faith M.I,523; Sn.1020; Bu II.6=J.I,3. (Page 675)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sadhammika: {'def': '[sa²+dhamma+ika] co-religionist D.II,273. (Page 675)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sadhana: {'def': '【形】富有的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】富有的。(p316)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj). [sa³+dhana] wealthy, rich D.I,73; J.I,334. (Page 675)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sadisa: {'def': '【形】等于，相似的。 ~tta, 【中】平等，类似。(p316)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [sa²+disa=dṛśa] similar, like, equal D.II,261; S.III,48 sq.; A.I,125=Pug.35; Vin.I,8; J.I,191; Dhs.116; Vism.543=VbhA.148. Cp. sādisa. (Page 674)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】等於，相似的。sadisatta,【中】平等，类似。sadisūpacāra﹐等分定。asadisa,【反】不等於，不相似的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sadiyana: {'def': '【中】 sadiyanā, 【阴】接受，据为己有。(p339)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sadā: {'def': '(adv.) [fr. saṁ°] always Sn.1041, 1087, 1119; Nd² 631 (where long stereotype definition); Dh.79; Pv.II,8¹¹ (=sabbakālaṁ yāvajīvaṁ PvA.110); II,9³⁷ (=sabbakālaṁ divase divase sāyañ ca pāto ca PvA.127); IV,1³⁰.

--matta “always revelling,” N. of a palace J.I,363 sq. (cp. Divy 603); a class of devas D.II,260. (Page 674)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【副】曾经，总是。sadātana,【形】永恒的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【副】曾经，总是。 ~tana, 【形】永恒的。(p316)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sadāra: {'def': '【阳】自己的妻子。(p316)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】自己的妻子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sagabbha: {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+gabbha] with a fœtus, pregnant Mhvs 33, 46. (Page 661)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】怀孕的。(p309)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】怀孕的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sagaha: {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+gaha²] full of crocodiles It.57, 114. As sagāha at S.IV,157. (Page 661)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sagandhaka: {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+gandha+ka] fragment Dh.52. (Page 661)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sagga: {'def': '【阳】快乐的地方，天堂。 ~kāya, 【阳】天上的集会。 ~magga, 【阳】登天之路。 ~loka, 【阳】天上世界。 ~saŋvattanika, 【形】导致登天的。(p309)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '天;天界', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '【阳】快乐的地方，天堂。saggakāya,【阳】天上的集会。saggamagga,【阳】登天之路。saggaloka,【阳】天上世界。saggasaṁvattanika,【形】导致登天的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic svarga, svar+ga] 1. heaven, the next world, popularly conceived as a place of happiness and long life (cp. the pop. etym. of “suṭṭhu-aggattā sagga” PvA.9; “rūpādīhi visayehi suṭṭhu aggo ti saggo” Vism.427); usually the kām’âvacara-devaloka, sometimes also the 26 heavens (ThA.74). Sometimes as sagga ṭhāna (cp. °loka), e. g. J.VI,210. -- Vin.I,223; D.II,86; III,52, 146 sq.; M.I,22, 483; S.I,12; A.I,55 sq., 292 sq.; II,83 sq.; III,244, 253 sq.; IV,81; V,135 sq.; Sn.224 (Loc. pl. saggesu); It.14; Pv.I,1³; Vism.103, 199.

--âpāya heaven and hell Th.2, 63; Sn.647. --ārohaṇa (-sopāna) (the stairs) leading to heaven (something like Jacob’s ladder) Vism.10. --kathā discourse or talk about heaven Vin.I,15 (cp. anupubbikathā) --kāya the heavenly assembly (of the gods) J.VI,573. --dvāra heaven’s gate Vism.57. --patha=sagga J.I,256. --pada heavenly region, heaven J.II,5; IV,272 (=saggaloka). --magga the way to heaven J.VI,287; DhA.I,4. --loka the heavenworld M.I,73; J.IV,272. --saṁvattanika leading to heaven D.III,66. (Page 662)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saggh°: {'def': 'see sakkoti. (Page 662)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sagguṇa: {'def': '【阳】好质量。(p309)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[sat+guṇa] good quality, virtue Sdhp.313. (Page 662)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】好特质。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saghaccā: {'def': '(f.) [sat+ghaccā] just or true killing J.I,177. (Page 662)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sagocara: {'def': '[sa²=saṁ, +gocara] companion, mate (lit. having the same activity) J.II,31. (Page 662)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sagotta: {'def': '【形】同一个血统的，同族者。(p309)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[sa²=saṁ,+gotta] a kinsman J.V,411; cp. VI,500. (Page 662)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】同一个血统的，同族者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Saguḷa: {'def': '[sa³+guḷa²] a cake with sugar J.VI,524. Cp. saṅguḷikā. (Page 661)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saguṇa: {'def': '(adj.) [either sa³+guṇa¹ 1, as given under guṇa¹; or sa°=saṁ° once, as in sakṛt,+guṇa¹ 2] either “with the string,” or “in one”; Vin.I,46 (saguṇaṁ karoti to put together, to fold up; C ekato katvā). This interpretation (as “put together”) is much to be preferred to the one given under guṇa¹ 1; saguṇaṁ katvā belongs to saṅghāṭiyo, and not to kāyabandhanaṁ, thus: “the upper robes are to be given, putting them into one (bundle).” (Page 661)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sagāha: {'def': '【形】充满凶猛的野兽。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】充满凶猛的野兽。(p309)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sagāmeyya: {'def': '【形】来自相同的村庄的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [grd. formation fr. gāma,+sa²=saṁ°) hailing from the same village S.I,36, 60. (Page 661)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】来自相同的村庄的。(p309)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sagārava: {'def': '【形】表示尊敬的。 ~vaŋ, 【副】表示尊敬地。 ~tā, 【阴】尊敬。(p309)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】表示尊敬的。sagāravavaṁ,【副】表示尊敬地。sagāravavatā,【阴】尊敬。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+gārava] respectful, usually comb^d with sappatissa & other syn., e. g. Vin.I,45; It.10; Vism.19, 221. (Page 661)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sagāravatā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. sagārava] respect Th.1, 589. (Page 661)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saha: {'def': '2(‹sah),【形】持久的，不朽的(submitting to, enduring )。sabbasaha﹐持久的。dussaha﹐难以持久的(hard to endure)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '1(连词), 与，一起，附有，伴随。sahagata,【形】和…有关的，具有的，俱行。sahaja, sahajāta,【形】俱生的，一起出生的。sahajīvī,【形】与…一起住的。sahajīvinī,【阴】同住女伴。sahanandī,【形】共庆的。sahadhammika,【形】同修。sahabhū,【形】一起出现的。sahayoga,【阳】连接，合作，saha 的应用。sahavāsa,【阳】一起住。sahaseyyā,【阴】同房。sahasokī,【形】分忧(一起伤心)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】持久的，不朽的。(p335)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ (indecl.) [fr. sa³; cp. Vedic saha] prep. & prefix, meaning: in conjunction with, together, accompanied by; immediately after (with Instr.) Vin.I,38; Sn.49, 928; Th.2, 414=425; sahā Sn.231.

--anukkama=sahānukkama with the bridle Dh.398; DhA.IV,161. --āmacca together with the ministers Mhvs 5, 182. --āvudha together with one’s weapons J.IV,416. --indaka together with Indra D.II,208, 221; Vv 30¹. --ūdaka together with water J.V,407. --oḍha together with the stolen goods; coraṁ °-aṁ gahetvā Vism.180; Mhvs 23, 11 (thena); 35, 11. See oḍḍha. --odaka containing water Mhvs 4, 13. --orodha with his harem Mhvs 5, 182; --kathin conversing with (Instr.) M.I,489. --kāra a sort of fragrant mango KhA 53. --gata accompanying, connected with, concomitant Vin.I,10; D.II,186; S.V,421; Kvu 337; DhsA.157. --ggaṇa together with his companions Dpvs 14, 58. --cetiya containing a Cetiya Mhvs 33, 10. --ja born at the same time Vv 81¹⁵. --jāta 1. born at the same time, of equal age J.I,54; VI,512. -- 2. arisen at the same time, coinciding with (Instr.) Kvu 337, 620; VbhA.127. ‹-› 3. (in °paccaya) the relation of co-nascence, coincidence Dukp 17 sq., 52 sq., 113 sq., 129 sq., 145 sq., 225 sq., 334 sq. and passim; Tikp 36 sq., 62 sq., 107 sq., 243 sq.; Vism.535. --jīvin (fem. --ī) living together with Vin.IV,291, 325 sq. --dhammika having the same Dhamma, co-religionist M.I,64; Nd¹ 485 (opp. para°); regarding the Dhamma D.I,94, 161; M.I,368; Vin.I,134; Nett 52; DA.I,263 (=sahetuka, sakāraṇa); that which is in accordance with the dhamma Dhs.1327; M.I,482; °ṁ adv. in accordance with the dhamma Vin.I,60, 69; III,178; IV,141. --dhammiya co-religionist Nett 169. --dhenuka accompanied by a cow Mhvs 21, 18. --nandin rejoicing with It.73. --paṁsukīḷita a companion in play, a playfellow A.II,186: J.I,364; IV,77; PvA.30. --pesuṇa together with slander Sn.862 f.; Nd¹ 257. --bhāvin being at one’s service J.III,181 (amacca). --bhū arising together with Dhs.1197; Nett 16; a class of devas D.II,260. --macchara with envy Sn.862. --yoga=karaṇa-vacana SnA 44. --vatthu living together with Th.2, 414= 425; ThA.269. --vāsa living together, associating Vin.II,34; It.68. --vāsin living together J.V,352. --saṅgha together with the Order Mhvs 1, 71. --seyyā sharing the same couch, living together Vin.IV,16; KhA 190. --sevaka together with the servants Mhvs 36, 43. --sokin sorrowful (?) S.IV,180. (Page 700)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (adj.) [fr. sah] submitting to, enduring M.I,33; Th.1, 659; J.VI,379; sabbasaha J.V,425, 431. -- dussaha hard to endure Sdhp.95, 118, 196 (Page 701)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(连词), 与，一起，附有，伴随。 ~gata, 【形】和…有关的，具有的。~ja, ~jāta, 【形】同时出生的，一起出生的。 ~jīvī, 【形】与…一起住的。 ~nandī, 【形】共庆的。 ~dhammika, 【形】同修。 ~bhū, 【形】一起出现的。 ~yoga, 【阳】连接，合作，saha 的应用。 ~vāsa, 【阳】一起住。 ~seyyā, 【阴】同房。 ~sokī, 【形】分忧（一起伤心）。(p335)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sahajātapaccaya: {'def': '﹐俱生缘。《发趣论》(Paṭṭhāna)(CS:p.1.4)：「俱生缘(Sahajātapaccaya)：1.是四非有色法(cattāro arūpimo dhammā﹐受.想.行.识之四蕴)是互相之俱生缘为缘，2.四大种是互相之俱生缘为缘，3.於入胎刹那(okkantikhaṇe，相同於‘在结生刹那’)之名与(心所依处)色是互相之俱生缘为缘，4.‘诸心心所法’依‘心等起诸色’之俱生缘为缘，5.四大种依诸所造色之俱生缘为缘，6.诸色法(心所依处色)某时(在结生刹那)依诸非有色法(四蕴)之俱生缘为缘，某时(在转起时)不依俱生缘为缘。」', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sahakāra: {'def': '【阳】一种香芒果。(p335)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】一种香芒果。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sahampati: {'def': 'm. 裟婆主=梵天.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '娑婆主梵天(Sahampatibrahmā)。SA.6.1./I,198.︰Sahampatissāti so kira Kassapassa Bhagavato sāsane Sahako nāma thero paṭhamajjhānaṁ nibbattetvā paṭhamajjhānabhūmiyaṁ kappāyukabrahmā hutvā nibbatto. Tatra naṁ “sahampatibrahmā”ti paṭisañjānanti. Taṁ sandhāyāha “brahmuno sahampatissā”ti.( ‘娑婆主梵天’︰在迦叶世尊的教中，有一位叫做娑婆(Sahako)的比丘，证得阿那含果，死后投生於初禅天，有初禅地寿命的梵天，在那里，他关联到溯往(名字故)称为‘娑婆主梵天’。) 《经集注》SnA.II,476. (3-10.Kokālikasuttavaṇṇanā)说他︰「死后投生於五净居天」(suddhāvāsesu uppanno)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '萨汉巴帝，巴利语的音译，大梵天人之名，居于初禅梵天。萨汉巴帝在过去咖沙巴佛时代，是一位名叫萨哈咖（Sahaka）的三果比库，因精于初禅，命终后投生至初禅梵天，故名。如《诸佛史》注中说：
“萨汉巴帝者，据说在咖沙巴世尊教法时期，有位名叫‘萨哈咖’的长老，从生起初禅之后不再退失禅那，寿命终结时投生到初禅地，成为寿長一劫的大梵天人，故在那里称他为‘萨汉巴帝’。”
《相应部注》（S.A.1.172）也有相似的说法。但在《经集注》（Sn.A.662）中则说他证得不来果后投生到净居天。
萨汉巴帝被认为是此轮围界最崇高的大梵天神（Jeṭṭhakamahābrahma），受到古印度婆罗门教的普遍礼敬和崇拜。他也是佛教护法主神之一，曾劝请刚成正自觉而不想说法的佛陀转动法轮（Mv.8-9; D.2.66-71）。在泰国寺院所供奉的四面四臂护法神像，据说就是这位大梵天神。', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Sahana: {'def': '【中】忍耐。(p335)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】忍耐。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sahassa: {'def': '[Sk. sahasra, see etym. under saṁ°] a thousand, used as a singular with a noun in the plural, sahassaṁ vācā Dh.100; satasahassaṁ vassāni J.I,29; also in the plural after other numerals cattāri satasahassāni chaḷabhiññā Bu II.204=J.I,29; also with the thing counted in the genitive, accharānaṁ sahassaṁ Mhvs 17, 13; A.I,227; or °-, as sahassa-yakkha-parivāra SnA 209. In combination with other numerals, sahassa is sometimes inflected like an adjective, saṭṭhisahassā amaccā sixty thousand ministers J.VI,484; satasahassiyo gāvo 100,000 cows Sn.308; the thing counted then precedes in a compound jāti-sahassaṁ 1,000 births D.I,13; It.99; ghaṭa-sahassam pi udakaṁ Miln.189; sindhava-sahasso ratho J.VI,103; sahassaṁ sahassena a thousand times a thousand Dh.103; sahassass’eva in thousands D.II,87. --sahassaṁ (nt.) 1,000 gold pieces Dh.106; J.VI,484; Miln.10; satasahassaṁ a hundred thousand J.I,28; sahassa (adj.) (fem. ī) worth a thousand J.V,484, 485; ThA.72 (Ap V,45, read sahassayo for °aso); epithet of Brahmā, the B. of a thousand world systems M.III,101. Cp. dasa-sahassī.

--akkha thousand-eyed, the god Sakka S.I,229; J.VI,203; sahassacakkhu the same J.V,394, 407. --aggha worth a thousand Miln.284. --āra having 1,000 spokes D.II,172. --ṭṭhavikā a purse with 1,000 pieces (of money) Vism.383; J.I,506; DhA.II,37; VvA.33. --netta thousandeyed, the god Sakka S.I,226; Sn.346; J.III,426; IV,313; V,408; VI,174; Vv 30¹⁰; DhA.I,17. --bāhu having a thousand arms, said of Ajjuna J.V,119, 135, 145 (°-rājā); 267, 273; VI,201. --bhaṇḍikā a heap of 1,000 pieces J.II,424; III,60; IV,2. --raṁsi the sun J.I,183. (Page 701)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Sk. sahasra),【中】千。sahassakkha,【阳】千眼帝释。sahassakkhattuṁ,【副】千次。sahassagghanaka,【形】值千的。sahassatthavikā,【阴】sahassabhaṇḍikā,【阴】有一千金币的袋子。sahassadhā,【副】一千个方法。sahassanetta, 参考sahassakkha。sahassaraṁsī,【阳】太阳。sahassāra,【形】有千辐的。sahassamaṇḍalachatta﹐千轮华盖。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】千。 ~kkha, 【阳】千眼帝释。 ~kkhattuŋ, 【副】千次。~gghanaka, 【形】值千的。 ~tthavikā, 【阴】 ~bhaṇḍikā, 【阴】有一千金币的袋子。 ~dhā, 【副】一千个方法。 ~netta, 参考 ~kkha。 ~raŋsī,【阳】太阳。 ~āra, 【形】有千辐的。(p335)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sahassadhā: {'def': '(adv.) [cp. satadhā etc.] in a thousand ways A.I,227; Th.1, 909. (Page 701)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sahassika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. sahassa] thousandfold J.I,17; IV,175 (so for °iyo). (Page 701)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】由一千个部分所组成的。 ~sīlokadhātu, 【阴】一千世界。(p336)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】由一千个部分所组成的(thousandfold)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sahassikasīlokadhātu: {'def': '【阴】一千世界(a thousandfold world, a world system )。S.56.11./V,424.︰Ayañca dasasahassilokadhātu saṅkampi sampakampi sampavedhi.(这一万个世界震动、大震动、强烈震动)。《长阿含30经》：「佛告诸比丘。如一日月周行四天下。光明所照。如是千世界。千世界中有千日月．千须弥山王．四千天下．四千大天下．四千海水．四千大海．四千龙．四千大龙．四千金翅鸟．四千大金翅鸟．四千恶道．四千大恶道．四千王．四千大王．七千大树．八千大泥犁．十千大山．千阎罗王．千四天王．千忉利天千焰摩天．千兜率天．千化自在天．千他化自在天．千梵天。是为小千世界。如一小千世界。尔所小千千世界。是为中千世界。如一中千世界。尔所中千千世界。是为三千大千世界。」(T1.114中；cf. 《大楼炭经》卷第一﹐大正1.277)三千大千世界究竟多大，无法详知。一千个世界(每个世界包括四大洲cattāro dīpā、日月等)，名为「小千世界」。1000个小千世界，名「中千世界」(100万个世界)。1000个中千世界，名「大千世界」(十亿个世界)，或称「三千大千世界」。大千世界，有百俱胝(koṭi, 1,000,000,000)四天下、日月等。我们这个大千世界，叫娑婆(sahā)世界，据目前的天文资料，我们所处的银河系(星系)，约有两千亿个恒星，聚集成直径约十万光年的圆盘，中央较厚；以本银河系为中心，半径200多万光年的范围内，有三十多个银河系，半径6500万光年，有超过2500个银河系，宇宙至少有五百多亿银河系。离太阳最近的恒星约有4.3光年(9.46×1012公里)，肉眼所能见到的恒星，都在数光年～数百光年，约6000颗(山上观望)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sahassī-lokadhātu: {'def': '(f.) a thousandfold world, a world system D.I,46; A.I,228; DA.I,130; dasasahassī-lokadhātu ten world systems J.I,51, 63; cp. dasasahassī and lokadhātu. (Page 701)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sahasā: {'def': '(adv.) [Instr. of sahas (Vedic), force] forcibly, hastily, suddenly Sn.123; DhA.III,381; PvA.40, 279; inconsiderately J.I,173; III,441. --°kāra violence D.I,5; III,176; A.II,209; Pug.58; J.IV,11; DA.I,80. (Page 701)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【副】突然，强制地。(p335)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【副】突然，强制地(forcibly, hastily, suddenly)。sahasākāra﹐暴力(violence)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sahasākāra: {'def': '﹐【阳】打家劫舍(的匪徒)。Sahasākāroti sāhasikakiriyā. Gehaṁ pavisitvā manussānaṁ ure satthaṁ ṭhapetvā icchitabhaṇḍānaṁ gahaṇaṁ.(打家劫舍：劫匪。闯入家里，在人的胸口置刀，抢劫财物。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sahati: {'def': '(sah + a), 忍受，忍耐，能干，克服。【过】 sahi。【现分】 sahanta, sahamāna。【独】 sahitvā。(p335)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': ' [sah to prevail] 1. to conquer, defeat, overcome M.I,33; S.IV,157; Sn.942; Dh.335; It.84; J.I,74; II,386 (avamānaṁ); III,423 (id.). -- 2. to bear, endure Sn.20; Pug.68. -- 3. to be able D.II,342 (sayhāmi); Pot. sahe Sn.942; Pot. saheyya M.I,33; saha (imper. excuse, forgive, beg your pardon!) J.III,109; grd. sayha that which can be endured, able to be done Sn.253; Dāvs II.29; a-sayha Miln.1148. (Page 701)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(sah忍耐+a), 1.克服(to conquer, defeat, overcome)。2.忍受，忍耐(to bear, endure)。3.能干(to be able)。【过】sahi。【现分】sahanta, sahamāna。【独】sahitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sahattha: {'def': '【阳】自己的手，亲手。(p335)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(sa4+hattha),【阳】自己的手，亲手(one’s own hand)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[sa⁴+hattha] one’s own hand J.I,68; usually sahatthā (Abl.) with one’s own hand Vin.I,18; A.I,274; D.I,109; Sn.p. 107; J.I,286; Pv.II,9⁸; II,9⁵⁴; Miln.15. Instr. sahatthena id. PvA.110, 124, 135; J.III,267; VI,305. Cp. sāhatthika. (Page 701)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sahatthin: {'def': '(sa3+hatthin),【形】跟象在一起(together with the elephant)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+hatthin] together with the elephant Mhvs 25, 70. (Page 701)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sahavya: {'def': '【中】 sahavyatā, 【阴】交谊，友谊。(p335)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(‹sahāya, cp. Sk. sāhāyya),【中】sahavyatā(=sahabyatā),【阴】交谊，友谊( companionship)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. sahāya, cp. Sk. sāhāyya] companionship Vv 47⁷ (=sahabhāva VvA.202). --°ûpaga coming into union with D.I,245. (Page 701)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sahavyatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. sahavya] companionship D.I,18, 235; II,206; M.II,195; III,99; S.IV,306; A.III,192. (Page 701)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sahetu: {'def': '(adj.) [sa+hetu] having a cause, together with the cause Vin.I,2; D.I,180; DA.I,263. See hetu. (Page 701)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sahetuka: {'def': 'having a cause, accompanied by a cause (especially of good or bad karma) A.I,82; Dhs.1073. (Page 701)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】有因素的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】有因素的。(p336)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sahirañña: {'def': '(adj.) [sa+hirañña] possessing gold Sn.102. (Page 701)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sahita: {'def': '【形】带有的，兼有的，联合的，放在一起的，一致的。【中】文学，经文，取火的钻木。【反】asahita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】带有的，兼有的，联合的，放在一起的，一致的。【中】文学，经文，取火的钻木。(p336)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of saṁ+dhā, cp. Sk. sahita=saṁhita] 1. accompanied with Mhvs 7, 27. -- 2. united, keeping together D.I,4; J.IV,347; Pug.57. -- 3. consistent, sensible, to the point D.I,8; A.II,138; IV,196; S.III,12; Dh.19 (at DhA.I,157 expl^d as a name for the Tipiṭaka, thus equalling Sk. saṁhita); Pug.42. -- 4. close together, thick Th.2, 254. -- araṇisahita (nt.) firewood and appurtenances Vin.II,217; D.II,340 sq.; J.I,212; DhA.II,246. -- sahitaṁvata (adj.) having a consistent or perpetual vow, i.e. living the holy life J.V,320 (=sīlācāra-sampanna C.); VI,525 (T. sahitabbata; C. expl^s as samādinna-vata gahita-tāpasa-vesa). Kern, Toev. II.51 takes it as a corrupted Sk. śaṁsita-vrata. (Page 701)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sahitabba: {'def': '(sahati 的【义】), 应该忍耐。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(sahati 的【潜】), 应该忍耐。(p336)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sahitar: {'def': '(ag. fr. sahati),【中】忍耐的人(one who endures)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[n. ag. fr. sahati] one who endures Sn.42. (Page 701)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sahitu: {'def': '【阳】忍耐的人。(p336)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sahoḍha: {'def': '【形】连同贼赃的。(p336)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'see under saha¹. (Page 701)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】连同贼赃的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sahā: {'def': '【梵】沙婆，沙诃。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sahājanetta: {'def': '[sahāja+netta] at Sn.1096 is of doubtful meaning (“all-seeing”?), it is expl^d as “spontaneously arisen omniscience” at Nd² 669 (where spelling is sahajānetta); lit. “coinciding eye”; SnA 598 expl^s as “sahajāta-sabbaññuta-ñāṇa-cakkhu.” (Page 701)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sahāya: {'def': 'sahāyaka, 【阳】朋友，盟友。 ~tā, 【阴】友谊。(p336)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'sahāyaka,【阳】朋友，盟友。sahāyatā,【阴】友谊。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Epic Sk. sahāya, fr. saha+i] companion, friend D.II,78; M.I,86; S.IV,288; Pug.36; Sn.35, 45 sq.; J.II,29; °-kicca assistance (?) J.V,339; °-matta companion J.IV,76; °-sampadā the good luck of having companions Sn.47; adiṭṭha-° a friend who has not yet been seen personally J.I,377; III,364; bahu-° having many friends Vin.II,158; nāhaṁ ettha sahāyo bhavis-sāmi I am not a party to that J.III,46; asahāya Miln.225. (Page 701)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sahāyaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. last] f. °yikā companion, ally, friend Vin.I,18; D.II,155; A.II,79, 186; J.I,165; II,29; V,159; VI,256 (gihī sahāyakā, read gihisahāyakā [?]). (Page 701)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sahāyatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. sahāya] companionship Dh.61; sahāyatta (nt.) the same Mhvs 30, 21. (Page 701)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sajala: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [sa³+jala] watery, wet; nt. water.

--da giving water, bringing rain (of wind) Vism.10. --dhara holding water, i, e. a cloud VvA.223. (Page 668)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sajana: {'def': '【中】拥抱。参考 Parissajana。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】参考 Parissajana。(p312)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[sa⁴+jana] a kinsman J.IV,11 (read °parijanaṁ). (Page 668)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sajati: {'def': '(saj + a), 拥抱。【过】 saji。【现分】 sajamāna。【独】 sajitvā。(p312)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saj黏住+a), 拥抱。【过】saji。【现分】sajamāna。【独】sajitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [svaj; Dhtp 74, 549=ajjana (?) or=sajati¹?] to embrace D.II,266 (imper. saja). udakaṁ sajati to embrace the water, poet. for “to descend into the water” J.IV,448 (T. sajāti); VI,198 (C.=abhisiñcati), 205 (C.= attano upari sajati [i. e. sajati¹] abbhukkirati). On C. readings cp. Kern, Toev II.51. (Page 668)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [sṛj, cp. Av. h∂r∂ƶaiti to let loose; Sk. sarga pouring out, sṛṣṭi emanation, creation] to let loose, send forth; dismiss, give up Sn.386, 390; J.I,359; V,218 (imper. sajāhi); VI,185, 205. -- infin. saṭṭhuṁ (q. v.); pp. saṭṭha (see vissaṭṭha). -- Caus. sajjeti (q. v.). -- For sajj° (Caus.) we find sañj° in sañjitar. (Page 668)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sajitar: {'def': 'see sañjitar. (Page 668)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sajja: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. formation fr. sajj=sañj Caus.; cp. the exact likeness of Ger. “fertig”] prepared, ready J.I,98; II,325; III,271; Miln.351; PvA.156, 256. Of a bow furnished with a bow-string A.III,75. (Page 668)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sajjaka: {'def': '(adj.)=sajja; J.IV,45 (gamana° ready for going, “fertig”). (Page 668)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sajjana: {'def': '¹ (nt.) [fr. sṛj] decking, equipping ThA.241. (Page 668)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】有品德的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】执着，装饰，准备。(p313)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】有品德的人。(p313)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² [sat(=sant)+jana] a good man Miln.321. (Page 668)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】执著，装饰，准备。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sajjati: {'def': '(saj + ya), 黏附于，执着。【过】 sajji。【过分】 saṭṭha。【现分】sajjamāna。【独】 sajjitvā。(p313)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Pass. of sañj or saj to hang. Cp. saṅga] 1. to cling, to, to be attached S.I,38, 111 (aor. 2 sg. sajjittho); II,228; A.II,165; J.I,376 (id. asajjittho); Sn.522, 536. ppr. (a)sajjamāna (un)--attached Sn.28, 466; J.III,352. -- 2. to hesitate J.I,376 (asajjitvā without hesitation). -- pp. satta¹. -- Cp. abhi° & vi°. (Page 668)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saj(梵sañj)+ya), 黏附於，执著。【过】sajji。【过分】saṭṭha。【现分】sajjamāna。【独】sajjitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sajjeti: {'def': '(saj+e), 准备，装备，装饰。【过】sajjesi。【现分】sajjenta。【独】sajjetvā, sajjiya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saj + e), 准备，装备，装饰。【过】 ~esi。【现分】 ~jenta。【独】~jetvā, sajjiya。(p313)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Caus. of sṛj (sajati¹), Sk. sarjayati] to send out, prepare, give, equip; to fit up, decorate: dānaṁ to give a donation DhA.II,88; pātheyyaṁ to prepare provisions J.III,343; gehe to construct houses J.I,18; nāṭakāni to arrange ballets J.I,59; yaññaṁ to set up a sacrifice J.I,336; dhammasabhaṁ to equip a hall for a religious meeting J.III,342; nagaraṁ to decorate the town J.V,212; paṇṇākāraṁ to send a present J.III,10. -- Caus. II. sajjāpeti to cause to be given or prepared J.I,446: PvA.81. Cp. vissajjeti. (Page 669)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sajjha: {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Sk. sādhya] silver D.II,351 (v. l.); S.V,92 (v. l.); A.III,16. Cp. sajjhu.

--kāra silversmith Miln.331. (Page 669)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sajjhu: {'def': '【中】银。sajjhumaya,【形】银制的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. sajjha] silver D.II,351; S.V,92; J.VI,48; Mhvs 19, 4; 27, 26; 28, 33. (Page 669)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】银。 ~maya, 【形】银制的。(p313)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sajjhāya: {'def': '【阳】学习，翫ㄨㄢˋ诵，排演。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】学习，排演。(p313)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. svādhyāya, sva+adhyāya, i. e. sa⁴+ ajjhaya, cp. ajjhayana & ajjhāyaka] repetition, rehearsal study D.III,241; Vin.I,133; II,194; A.IV,136; S.V,121 J.I,116, 436; II,48; Miln.12, KhA 24; VbhA.250 sq. ‹-› °ṁ karoti to study D.III,241; A.III,22; J.V,54. (Page 669)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sajjhāyanā: {'def': '【阴】朗诵，研究。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】朗诵，研究。(p313)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sajjhāyati: {'def': '[denom. fr. sajjhāya, cp. BSk. svādhyāyita AvŚ I.287; II,23] to rehearse, to repeat (aloud or silently), to study J.I,435; II,273; III,216; IV,64; Miln.10. -- ppr. °āyanto DhA.III,347; ger. sajjhāya S.I,202, & sajjhāyitvā J.IV,477; V,450; KhA 97. -- Caus. sajjhāpeti to cause to learn, to teach J.III,28 (of teacher, with adhīyati, of pupil). Caus. II. sajjhāyāpeti id. Miln.10. (Page 669)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saŋ + jhā + ya), 预演，背诵，学习。【过】 ~āyi。【过分】 ~yita。【独】 ~yitvā。【现分】 ~yamāna。(p313)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+jhā+ya), 预演，背诵，学习。【过】sajjhāyi。【过分】sajjhāyita。【独】sajjhāyitvā。【现分】sajjhāyamāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sajjita: {'def': '[pp. of sajjeti] issued, sent off; offered, prepared S.II,186; Vin.III,137 (here in sense of “happy”= sukhita); Miln.244 (of an arrow: sent); Mhvs 17, 7; 27, 16. -- nt. offering (=upakkhaṭa) DA.I,294; PvA.107. (Page 668)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(sajjeti 的【过分】)。(p313)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(sajjeti 的【过分】) 已准备，已装备，已装饰。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sajju: {'def': '【无】立即地，快速地，在同一时刻。 ~kaŋ, 【副】很快地。(p313)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【无】立即地，快速地，在同一时刻。sajjukaṁ,【副】很快地。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adv.) [Sk. sadyaḥ, sa+dyaḥ, lit. one the same day] 1. instantly, speedily, quickly Dāvs III,37. -- 2. newly, recently Dh.71 (°khīra; cp. DhA.II,67). (Page 669)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sajjukaṁ: {'def': '=sajju: 1. quickly Mhvs 7, 6; 14, 62. -- 2. newly VvA.197. (Page 669)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sajjulasa: {'def': '【阳】树脂。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】树脂。(p313)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. sarjarasa; see Geiger, P.Gr. § 19²] resin Vin.I,202. (Page 669)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sajjā: {'def': '(f.) [orig. grd. of sad] seat, couch Pv.II,12⁸ (explⁿ at PvA.157 doubtful). (Page 668)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sajotibhūta: {'def': '【无】着火的，发红的。(p312)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+joti+bhūta; same BSk., e. g. MVastu I.5] flaming, ablaze, aglow D.I,95; Vin.I,25; A.I,141; J.I,232; DA.I,264. (Page 668)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【无】著火的，火红的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sajāti: {'def': '(f.) [sa²+jāti] (being of) the same class or caste Vin.I,87; J.II,108 (°putta). (Page 668)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sajātika: {'def': '【形】同种族的，同国家的。(p312)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】同种族的，同国家的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sajīva: {'def': '¹ (adj.) [sa³+jīva] endowed with life Mhvs 11, 13. (Page 668)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】具有生命的。Pārā.III,24(CS:Pārā.pg.28)︰Sājīvaṁ nāma yaṁ Bhagavatā paññattaṁ sikkhāpadaṁ, etaṁ sājīvaṁ nāma. Tasmiṁ sikkhati, tena vuccati sājīvasamāpannoti.(有命者︰凡是在世尊制定的学处(=戒条)(下学习)，这称为‘有命者’。在学(戒)上，具有生命者。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】具有生命的。(p312)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² [for saciva?] a minister J.VI,307, 318 (=amacca C.). (Page 668)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sajīvāna: {'def': '(nt.) at S.I,44 is metric spelling for sa-jīvana [sa²=saṁ,+jīvana] “same livelihood,” in phrase kiṁsu kamme s. “what is (of) the same livelihood in work, i. e. occupation?” The form is the same as jīvāna at J.III,353. Taken wrongly as Gen. pl. by Mrs. Rh. D. in trslⁿ (K.S. I.63): “who in their work is mate to sons of men?” following Bdhgh’s wrong interpretation (see K.S. I.321) as “kammena saha jīvantānan; kammadutiyakā nāma honti.” (Page 668)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Saka: {'def': '【形】自己的。【阳】亲戚。【中】自己的财产。 ~mana, 【形】欢喜的。(p308)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'm. [Sk. Śaka] 塞族, サカ族[西北インドに侵入したイラン系のサカ族(スキタイ). インドで使用されるサカ紀元は8世紀に始まる]', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}; {'def': '(adj.) [sa⁴+ka] own D.I,106, 119, 231; II,173 (sakaṁ te “all be your own,” as greeting to the king); M.I,79; Vin.I,3, 249 (ācariyaka); S.V,261 (id.); Sn.861; It.76; Nd¹ 252; Pv.I,5¹ (ghara); II,6¹ (bhātā). -- Opp. assaka². -- appassaka having little or nothing as one’s own (=daḷidda) A.I,261; II,203; kamma-ssaka possessing one’s own kamma M.III,203 sq.; A.V,288; Miln.65; Dhs.1366.

--gavacaṇḍa violent towards one’s own cows, harassing one’s own Pug.47. (Page 659)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】自己的。【阳】亲戚。【中】自己的财产。sakamana,【形】欢喜的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sakabala: {'def': '【形】(saka+bala:) 自己的力量，(sa+kabala:) 口中有食物的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】 (saka + bala:) 自己的力量，(sa + kabala:) 口中有食物的。(p308)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [sa+kabala] containing a mouthful Vin.IV,195. (Page 660)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sakadāgāmin: {'def': '[sakad=sakid, +āgāmin] “returning once,” one who will not be reborn on earth more than once; one who has attained the second grade of saving wisdom Vin.I,293; D.I,156, 229; III,107; M.I,34; S.III,168; A.I,120, 232 sq.; II,89, 134; III,348; IV,292 sq., 380; V,138 sq., 372 sq.; DhA.IV,66. (Page 660)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sakadāgāmitā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. last] the state of a “oncereturner” D.II,206. (Page 660)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sakadāgāmī: {'def': '【阳】斯陀含(一来，二果圣人)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】斯陀含（一来，二果圣人）。(p308)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '一来, 斯陀含', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Sakala: {'def': '【形】全部的，整个的。(p308)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Sk. sakala] all, whole, entire Vin.II,109; Vism.321; SnA 132; PvA.93, 97, 111. Cp. sākalya. (Page 660)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】全部的，整个的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sakalikā: {'def': '【阴】碎片。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】碎片。(p308)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. sakala=Sk. śakala potsherd] a potsherd; a splinter, bit D.II,341; A.II,199=S.IV,197; S.I,27= Miln.179; M.I,259; A.V,9 (°aggi); J.IV,430; Miln.134; KhA 43 (maccha°); Nett 23; DhsA.319. -- sakalikaṁ sakalikaṁ in little pieces Vin.II,112. -- sakalika-hīra a skewer J.IV,29, 30. (Page 660)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sakamana: {'def': '[saka+mana] is Bdhgh’s explⁿ of attamana (q. v.), e. g. DA.I,129, 255. (Page 660)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sakamma: {'def': '【中】自己的责任。 ~ka, 【形】及物的（动词）。(p308)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】自己的责任。sakammaka,【形】及物的(动词)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [sa⁴+kamma] one’s own occupation D.I,135. (Page 660)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sakaraṇīya: {'def': '【形】仍然有点事要做的人。(p308)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】仍然有点事要做的人(one who still has something to do)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+karaṇīya] one who still has something to do (in order to attain perfection) D.II,143; Th.1, 1045; Miln.138. (Page 660)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sakaruṇ: {'def': 'a-bhāva [sa³+karuṇa+bhāva] being full of compassion SnA 318. (Page 660)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sakasaṭa: {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+k.] faulty, wrong (lit. bitter) Miln.119 (vacana). (Page 660)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sakatā: {'def': '(f.) (-°) [abstr. fr. saka] one’s own nature, identity, peculiarity: see kamma-ssakatā & adj. °ssakata. It may also be considered as an abstr. formation fr. kamma-ssaka. (Page 660)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sakaṅkha: {'def': '【形】可疑的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】可疑的。(p308)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sakaṇika: {'def': '(adj.) [sa+kaṇa+ika] having a mole D.I,80; DA.I,223. (Page 659)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sakaṇṇajappaka: {'def': '[sa+kaṇṇa+jappa+ka] whispering in the ear, a method of (secretly) taking votes Vin.II,98 sq. (salāka-gāha). (Page 660)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sakaṇṭaka: {'def': '【形】多刺的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】多刺的。(p308)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [sa+kaṇṭaka] thorny, dangerous D.I,135; Th.2, 352; DA.I,296. (Page 659)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sakaṭa: {'def': '【阳、中】手推车，四轮马车。 ~bhāra, ~vāha, 【阳】一满车（的装货量）。 ~vyūba, 【阳】车形阵（的军阵）。(p308)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ (m. & nt.) [cp. Sk. śakaṭa; Vedic śakaṭī] a cart, waggon; a cartload D.II,110; Vin.III,114; J.I,191; Miln.238; PvA.102; VbhA.435 (simile of two carts); SnA 58 (udaka-bharita°), 137 (bīja°). sakaṭāni pajāpeti to cause the carts to go on J.II,296.

--gopaka the guardian of the waggon DhA.IV,60. --bhāra a cart-load VvA.79. --mukha the front or opening of the waggon, used as adj. “facing the waggon or the cart” (?) at D.II,234, of the earth -- that is, India as then known -- and at D.II,235 (comp. Mahāvastu III,208), of six kingdoms in Northern India. At the second passage B. explains that the six kingdoms all debouched alike on the central kingdom, which was hexagonal in shape. This explanation does not fit the other passage. Could sakaṭa there be used of the constellation Rohinī, which in mediæval times was called the Cart? Cp. Dial. II.269. --vāha a cart-load Pv.II,7⁵. --vyūha “the waggon array,” a wedge-shaped phalanx J.II,404; IV,343; Vism.384. (Page 659)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】【中】手推车，四轮马车。sakaṭabhāra, sakaṭavāha,【阳】一满车(的装货量)。sakaṭavyūba,【阳】车形阵(的军阵)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² see kasaṭa. (Page 659)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sakha: {'def': 'sakhi, 【阳】朋友。 sakhitā, 【阴】友谊。(p309)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'sakhi,【阳】朋友。Sakhā, sakhī,【阴】女朋友。sakhitā,【阴】友谊。 a companion, friend; Nom. sakhā ; Acc. sakhāraṁ; & sakhaṁ; Instr. sakhinā; Abl. sakhārasmā; Gen. sakhino; Voc. sakhā; Nom. pl. sakhā ; & sakhāro; Gen. sakhīnaṁ & sakhānaṁ. In compn with bhū as sakhi° & sakhī°, e. g. sakhibhāva friendship & sakhībhāva', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sakhi: {'def': '[Vedic sakhi m. & f.] a companion, friend; Nom. sakhā J.II,29; 348; Acc. sakhāraṁ J.II,348; V,509; & sakhaṁ J.II,299; Instr. sakhinā J.IV,41; Abl. sakhārasmā J.III,534; Gen. sakhino J.VI,478; Voc. sakhā J.III,295; Nom. pl. sakhā J.III,323; & sakhāro J.III,492; Gen. sakhīnaṁ J.III,492; IV,42; & sakhānaṁ J.II,228. In compⁿ with bhū as sakhi° & sakhī°, e. g. sakhibhāva friendship J.VI,424; PvA.241; & sakhībhāva J.III,493. (Page 661)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sakhibhāva: {'def': '友谊(friendship)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sakhikā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. sakhi] a female friend J.III,533. (Page 661)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sakhila: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. sakhi] kindly in speech, congenial D.I,116; Vin.II,11; J.I,202, 376; Miln.207; Pv IV.1³³ (=mudu PvA.230). Cp. sākhalya.

--vācatā use of friendly speech Dhs.1343. (Page 661)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】言语慈祥的。(p309)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】言语慈祥的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sakhitā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. sakhi] friendship Th.1, 1018, 1019. (Page 661)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sakhura: {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+khura] with the hoofs J.I,9; Bdhgh on M. I.78 (see M.I,536). (Page 661)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sakhya: {'def': '【中】友谊。(p309)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】友谊。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. sākhya; cp. sakkhī] friendship J.II,409; VI,353 sq. (Page 661)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sakhī: {'def': '(f.) [to sakhi] a female friend J.II,27, 348. (Page 661)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sakicca: {'def': '【中】自己的事情。(p308)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [sa⁴+kicca] one’s own duty or business Vism.321 (°pasuta). (Page 660)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】自己的事情。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sakiccaya: {'def': '(nt.) [sa⁴+kiccaya=kṛtya]=sakicca Miln.42; DhsA.196 (°pasuta). (Page 660)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sakid: {'def': '& Sakiṁ (adv.) [fr. sa°=saṁ] once. (1) sakiṁ: D.II,188; J.I,397; DhA.III,116 (sakiṁvijātā itthi= primipara); once more: Miln.238; once for all: Th.2, 466; DhA.II,44; ThA.284.- (2) sakid (in composition; see also sakad-āgāmin): in sakid eva once only A.II,238; IV,380; Pug.16; PvA.243; at once Vin.I,31. (Page 660)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sakideva: {'def': '﹐一时。(=ekāvajanena)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sakiya: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. saka, cp. Sk. svakīya] own J.II,177 III,48, 49; IV,177. (Page 660)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '[Sk. Śakya] 釈氏, 釈迦族. =Sakya. -māna 釈氏慢, 釈迦族としての慢', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Sakiñcana: {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+kiñcana] having something; (appl^d) with attachment, full of worldly attachment Sn.620= Dh.I,246; Dh.396 (=rāg’ādīhi kiñcanehi sakiñcana DhA.IV,158). (Page 660)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】有世间的执着的。(p308)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】有世间的执著的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sakiŋ: {'def': '【副】一次。(p308)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sakiṁ: {'def': '【副】一次。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sakka: {'def': '2(梵Wakya),【阳】释迦，释迦族的人。释迦族有五姓：瞿昙(巴Gotama；梵Gautama)、甘蔗(巴；梵Iksvāku)、日种(巴Suriya-vaṁsa；梵Sūriya-vaṃwa)、释迦(巴Sakka；梵Wākya)、舍夷(巴；梵Sākī)。《中部注》：Sīhahanurañño(狮子颚王，古译：狮子颊王)的五子：Suddhodano(净饭王，释迦牟尼佛之父), Sukkodano(白饭王), Sakkodano (释迦饭王), Dhotodano (纯饭王，古译：斛饭王), Amitodano (无量饭王，古译：甘露饭王，‘甘露’的巴利文是Amato). (Mūlapaṇṇāsa-aṭṭhakathā, CS:p.1.366；《律部》Pācityādiyojanā﹐pg.98.；《律部》Sāratthadīpanī-ṭīkā(tatiyo bhāgo) pg.3.78)。《经集注》Suttanipāta-aṭṭhakathā, (CS:p.2.88)的顺序不同：Suddhodano, Amitodano, Dhotodano, Sakkodano, Sukkodano.《中部注》(MA.14./II,61.)说：摩诃男及阿那律是兄弟，世尊的小叔父之子。净饭王、白饭王、释迦饭王、纯饭王、无量饭王五位是亲兄弟，无量公主是他们的姐妹，帝沙上座是她的儿子。如来与难陀(Mahāpajāpatī的儿子，DhpA.v.391.)上座是净饭王之子。摩诃男及阿那律是白饭王之子。阿难陀上座是无量饭王之子，世尊最年轻的堂弟。摩诃男是比较老(资格)的斯陀洹的声闻弟子。(Mahānāmoti Anuruddhattherassa bhātā Bhagavato cuḷapituputto. Suddhodano Sukkodano Sakkodano Dhotodano Amitodanoti ime pañca janā bhātaro. Amitā nāma devī tesaṁ bhaginī. Tissatthero tassā putto. Tathāgato ca Nandatthero ca Suddhodanassa puttā, Mahānāmo ca Anuruddhatthero ca Sukkodanassa. ānandatthero Amitodanassa, so Bhagavato kaniṭṭho. Mahānāmo mahallakataro sakadāgāmī ariyasāvako.《波逸提等解说》说：释迦饭王、纯饭王之子不明(Sakkodanadhotodanānaṁ puttā apākaṭā.)另外提到「无量(公主)及巴莉达滴(公主)两位是姐妹」(Amitā, Pālitāti(Pāmitā) dve bhaginiyo.) (Pācityādiyojanā,pg.98)《说一切有部》传说：提婆达多是无量饭(甘露饭)王之子(毗奈耶破僧事卷二)；《化地部》传说：提婆达多是白饭王之子(五分律卷十五)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】能干的，可能的。(p308)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '3(梵wakya),【阳】帝释天王。Sakko devānaṁ Indo﹐帝释，又作释提恒因，即忉利天之主。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. śak, cp. Sk. śakya] able, possible Sn.143. sasakkaṁ (=sa³+s.) as much as possible, as much as one is able to M.I,415, 514. (Page 660)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】 1. 释迦家族的人，2. 天王。(p308)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '1(‹wak, cp. Sk. wakya),【形】能干的(台语：有才调u7 cai5 tiau7)，可能的(able, possible)。sasakkaṁ (=sa3+sakkaṁ)尽可能(as much as possible)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'm. ① [Sk. Śakra] 釈天, 帝釈, インドラ. -devarājan, -devinda 天王帝釈. -pajāpati 帝釈の妃. -pañha 帝釈所問, 釈問. ② [=Sakya, Sk. Śakya] 釈迦, 釈迦族. -rājan 釈迦王.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Sakka devānaminda: {'def': '沙咖天帝，直译作沙咖诸天之主。沙咖，直译为“能”，或以恭敬（sakkacca）布施故，名为“沙咖”。为三十三天之主，居住在须弥山顶善见城（Sudassana）中的最胜殿（Vejayanta），亦是佛教的护法主神。
根据《长部·沙咖问经》，有一天，沙咖天帝见到五种先兆（pañca pubbanimittāni），知道自己即将命终，于是带领诸天众前往拜谒世尊。在听闻世尊说法之后，他与八万天众皆证得了入流果。
沙咖天帝还有许多名字：因过去世为人时是名叫马喀的婆罗门，故名“马喀瓦”（Maghavā）。因能同时思考一千件事，故名“千眼者”（Sahassakkha， Sahassacakkhu， Sahassanetta）；因他曾不停地做布施，故名Purindada（或作城市毁坏者）；他手持武器“金刚”，故名“金刚手”（Vajirapāṇī）；因娶阿苏罗王之女苏佳为妻，故名“苏佳主”（Sujampati）等。
汉传佛教将之讹略为帝释、天帝释、释提桓因。', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Sakka-devānam-inda: {'def': '（天部衆名）沙咖天帝，（古音译：）帝释天，释提桓因，释迦提婆因陀罗', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Sakkacca: {'def': '(ṁ) (adv.) [orig. ger. of sakkaroti] respectfully, carefully, duly, thoroughly; often with uppaṭṭhahati to attend, serve with due honour. -- Vv 12⁵; Miln.305; J.IV,310. The form sakkaccaṁ is the older and more usual, e. g. at D.II,356 sq.; S.IV,314; A.II,147; IV,392; Vin.IV,190, 275; Th.1, 1054; J.I,480; Dh.392; PvA.26, 121. The BSk. form is satkṛtya, e. g. MVastu I.10. --kārin zealous S.III,267; Miln.94. --dāna M.III,24. (Page 660)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ger. of sakkaroti),【独】尊敬了、珍惜了(respectfully)，仔细地(carefully)。sakkaccakārī,【阳】小心行动者。sakkaccaṁ,【副】小心地，彻底地。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【独】准备好可，礼敬了，尊敬了。 ~kārī, 【阳】小心行动者。~caŋ, 【副】小心地，彻底地。(p308)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sakkaroti: {'def': '(saṁ+kar行+o), 尊敬，尊敬地对待，受到周到地招待。【过】sakkari。【过分】sakkata。【现分】sakkaronta。【义】sakkaritabba, sakkātabba。【独】sakkatvā, sakkaritvā。【不】sakkarituṁ, sakkātuṁ。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + kar + o), 尊敬，尊敬地对待，受到周到地招待。【过】sakkari。【过分】 sakkata。【现分】 ~karonta。【潜】 ~ritabba,sakkātabba。【独】 sakkatvā, ~karitvā。【不】 ~karituŋ, sakkātuŋ。(p309)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[sat+kṛ] to honour, esteem, treat with respect, receive hospitably; often comb^d with garukaroti, māneti, pūjeti, e. g. D.I,91, 117; III,84; M.I,126. ppr. °karonto D.II,159; Pot. °kareyya It.110; aor. °kari PvA.54; ger. °katvā Pug.35; J.VI,14, & °kacca (q. v.). -- pp. sakkata. -- Caus. sakkāreti=sakkaroti; Mhvs 32, 44; grd. sakkāreyya Th.1, 186 (so read for °kareyya). (Page 660)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sakkarīyati: {'def': '(sakkaroti 的【被】), 被尊敬。【现分】 ~riyamāna。(p309)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(sakkaroti‘尊敬’的【被】), 被尊敬。【现分】sakkariyamāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sakkata: {'def': '[pp. of sakkaroti] honoured, duly attendo D.I,114, 116; II,167; Nd 73; J.I,334; Miln.21; SnA 43 Usually comb^d with garukata, pūjita, mānita. (Page 660)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(sakkaroti 的【过分】), 已尊敬，已按时照顾。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(sakkaroti 的【过分】), 已尊敬，已按时照顾。(p308)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sakkati: {'def': ' [ṣvaṣk; Dhtp 9: gamana] to go; see osakkati & cp. Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 302. Other P. cpds. are ussakkati & paṭisakkati. (Page 660)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sakkatta: {'def': '【中】天王的地位。(p308)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'n. [Sakka-tta] 帝釈位. -rajja 帝釈国.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '【中】天王的地位。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. Sakka=Indra] Śakraship, the position as the ruler of the devas M.III,65; J.I,315; Vism.301 (brahmatta+). °rajja a kingdom rivalling Sakka’s J.I,315. (Page 660)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sakkatvā: {'def': '(sakkaroti 的【独】)。(p309)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[sakkaroti尊敬] 的【独】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sakkhali: {'def': 'sakkhalikā,【阴】耳孔，薄片，鱼鳞。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(& Sakkhalikā) (f.) [cp. Sk. śaṣkulī] 1. the orifice of the ear: see kaṇṇa°. -- 2. a sort of cake or sweetmeat (cp. saṅguḷikā) A.III,76 (T. sakkhalakā; v. l. °likā & saṅkulikā); Vin.III,59; J.II,281. (Page 661)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'sakkhalikā, 【阴】耳孔，薄片，鱼鳞。(p309)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sakkharikā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. sakkharā] in loṇa° a piece of salt crystal Vin.I,206; II,237. (Page 661)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sakkharilla: {'def': '(adj.) [=sakkharika, fr. sakkharā] containing gravel, pebbly, stony A.IV,237. (Page 661)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sakkharā: {'def': '【阴】1.碎石(gravel, grit)。2.陶瓷破片(potsherd)。3.颗粒、晶体(grain, granule, crystal, in loṇasakkharā)。4.粗糖((granulated) sugar)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. Vedic śarkarā gravel] 1. gravel, grit Vin.III,147=J.II,284; J.I,192; A.I,253; D.I,84; Pv III,2²⁸; DhA.IV,87. -- 2. potsherd VvA.157; PvA.282, 285. -- 3. grain, granule, crystal, in loṇa° a salt crystal S.II,276; DhA.I,370; SnA 222. -- 4. (granulated) sugar J.I,50. (Page 661)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】水晶，碎石，粗糖。(p309)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sakkheyyavacasā: {'def': '（sakkheyya-vacasā）, 说话可靠﹑值得信赖。Pārā.III,189︰Saddheyyavacasā nāma āgataphalā abhisametāvinī viññātasāsanā.(值得信赖︰已经证果、现观、解教法)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sakkhi: {'def': '【无】面对面，眼前。sakkhika, sakkhī,【形】目击者，证人。sakkhidiṭṭha,【形】相见。sakkhipuṭṭha, 被请做证人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【无】面对面，眼前。 ~ka, ~khī, 【形】目击者，证人。 ~diṭṭha, 【形】相见。 ~puṭṭha, 被请做证人。(p309)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ [sa³+akkhin; cp. Sk. sākṣin] an eyewitness D.II,237 (Nom. sg. sakkhī=with his own eyes, as an eyewitness); Sn.479, 921, 934 (sakkhi dhammaṁ adassi, where the corresp. Sk. form would be sākṣād); J.I,74. -- kāya-sakkhī a bodily witness, i. e. one who has bodily experienced the 8 vimokkhas A.IV,451; Vism.93, 387, 659. -- sakkhiṁ karoti [Sk. sākṣī karoti] (1) to see with one’s own eyes S.II,255; (2) to call upon as a witness (with Gen. of person) J.VI,280 (rājāno); DhA.II,69 (Moggallānassa sakkhiṁ katvā); PvA.217 (but at 241 as “friendship”). Note. The P. form is rather to be taken as an adv. (“as present”) than adj.: sakkhiṁ & sakkhi, with reduced sakkhi° (cp. sakid & sakiṁ). See also sacchi°.

--diṭṭha seen face to face M.I,369; D.I,238; J.VI,233. --puṭṭha asked as a witness Sn.84, 122; Pug.29. --bhabbatā the state of becoming an eyewitness, of experiencing M.I,494; DhsA.141. --sāvaka a contemporaneous or personal disciple D.II,153. (Page 661)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sakkhī: {'def': '(f.) or sakkhi² (nt.) [cp. Sk. sākhya] friendship (with somebody=Instr.) S.I,123=A.V,46 (janena karoti sakkhiṁ make friends with people); Pv IV.1⁵⁷; IV,1⁶⁵; J.III,493; IV,478. Cp. sakhya. (Page 661)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sakko: {'def': 'devānam Indo m. [BSk. Śakro devānām Indraḥ.] 神々の王たる釈, 釈提桓因, 天帝釈.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Sakkoti: {'def': '(sak(梵wak)+o), 能(possible)。【3.单.过】asakkhi，sakkhi，sakkuṇi；【1.复.过】asakkhimha & asakkhimhā。【现分】sakkonta。【现】sakkoti; sakkati [=class.Sk.wakyate]。【义】sakkuṇeyya; archaic 1st pl.sakkuṇemu；【未】sakkhati; sakkhīti [=Sk.waksyati]、【3.复.未】sakkhinti Sn 28、【2.单.未】sagghasi、【3.单.未】sakkhissati。【未被】sakkuṇeyya(【反】不可能asakkuṇeyya (impossible))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(sak + o), 能。【过】 asakkhi。【现分】 sakkonta。(p309)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': ' [śak; def. Dhtp 508 etc. as “sattiyaṁ”: see satti] to be able. Pres. sakkoti D.I,246; Vin.I,31; Miln.4; DhA.I,200; sakkati [=Class. Sk. śakyate] Nett 23. Pot. sakkuṇeyya J.I,361; PvA.106; archaic 1^st pl. sakkuṇemu J.V,24; Pv.II,8¹. ppr. sakkonto Miln.27. -- Fut. sakkhati Sn.319; sakkhīti [=Sk. śakṣyati] M.I,393; pl. 3^rd sakkhinti Sn.28; 2^nd sg. sagghasi Sn.834; 3^rd sg. sakkhissati DhA.IV,87. -- Aor. asakkhi D.I,96, 236; PvA.38; sakkhi Miln.5; J.V,116; 1^st pl. asakkhimha PvA.262, & asakkhimhā Vin.III,23; 3^rd sg. also sakkuṇi Mhvs 7, 13. -- grd. sakkuṇeyya (neg. a°) (im)possible J.I,55; PvA.122. -- sakka & sakkā see sep. (Page 661)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sakkuṇeyyatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. sakkuṇeyya, grd. of sakkoti] possibility; a° impossibility PvA.48. (Page 661)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】可能性，能力。(p309)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】可能性，能力。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sakkuṇāti: {'def': '(sak + uṇā), 能。【过】 ~kuṇi。【现分】 ~ṇanta。【独】 ~ṇitvā。(p309)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(sak+uṇā), 能。【过】sakkuṇi。【现分】sakkuṇanta。【独】sakkuṇitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sakkā: {'def': '【无】那是可能的。(p309)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(indecl.) [originally Pot. of sakkoti=Vedic śakyāt; cp. Prk. sakkā with Pischel’s explⁿ in Prk. Gr. § 465. A corresponding formation, similar in meaning, is labbhā (q. v.)] possible (lit. one might be able to); in the older language still used as a Pot., but later reduced to an adv. with infin. E. g. sakkā sāmaaññphalaṁpaññāpetuṁ would one be able to point out a result of samaṇaship, D.I,51; khādituṁ na sakkā, one could not eat, J.II,16; na sakkā maggo akkhātuṁ, the way cannot be shown, Mil 269; sakkā etaṁ mayā ñātuṁ? can I ascertain this? D.I,187; sakkā honti imāni aṭṭha sukhāni vindituṁ, these eight advantages are able to be enjoyed, J.I,8; sakkā etaṁ abhavissa kātuṁ, this would be possible to do, D.I,168; imaṁ sakkā gaṇhituṁ, this one we can take J.IV,219. See also SnA 338, 376 (=labbhā); PvA.12, 69, 96. (Page 660)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【无】那是可能的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sakkāra: {'def': '(sat+kar(梵kr)作)(梵satkāra ),【阳】款待(hospitality)，尊敬，恭敬(honour, worship)。sakkāraṁ karoti﹐表示尊敬(to pay reverence)，告别(to say goodbye)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. sat+kṛ] hospitality, honour, worship Vin.I,27, 183; A.II,203; J.I,63; II,9, 104; Dh.75; Miln.386; Dhs.1121; Vism.270; SnA 284; VbhA.466. °ṁ karoti to pay reverence, to say goodbye DhA.I,398. Cp. lābha. (Page 661)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】尊敬，款待。(p309)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sakkāreti: {'def': 'is Caus. of sakkaroti (q. v.). (Page 661)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sakkāya: {'def': '【阳】已存在的身体。 ~diṭṭhi, 【阴】有身见。(p309)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[sat+kāya, cp. BSk. satkāya Divy 46; AvŚ I.85. See on explⁿ of term Mrs. Rh. D. in J.R.A.S. 1894, 324; Franke Dīgha trslⁿ p. 45; Geiger P.Gr. § 24¹; Kern. Toev. II.52] the body in being, the existing body or group (=--nikāya q. v.); as a t.t. in P. psychology almost equal to individuality; identified with the five khandhas M.I,299; S.III,159; IV,259; A.II,34; Th.2, 170, 239; DhsA.348. See also D.III,216 (cp. Dial. III,216¹); A.III,293, 401; Nd¹ 109.

--diṭṭhi theory of soul, heresy of individuality, speculation as to the eternity or otherwise of one’s own individuality M.I,300=III,17=DhS 1003, S.III,16 sq. In these passages this is explained as the belief that in one or other of the khandhas there is a permanent entity, an attā. The same explanation, at greater length, in the Diṭṭhigata Sutta (Ps.I,143--151). As delusions about the soul or ghost can arise out of four sorts of bias (see abhinivesa) concerning each of the five khandhas, we have twenty kinds of s° diṭṭhi: fifteen of these are kinds of sakkāya-vatthukā sassata-diṭṭhi, and five are kinds of s°-vatthukā uccheda-diṭṭhi (ibid. 149, 150). Gods as well as men are s° pariyāpannā S.III,85; and so is the eye, DhsA.308. When the word diṭṭhi is not expressed it is often implied, Th.2, 199, 339; Sn.231. S° diṭṭhi is the first Bond to be broken on entering the Path (see saṁyojana); it is identical with the fourth kind of Grasping (see upādāna); it is opposed to Nibbāna, S.IV,175; is extinguished by the Path, M.I,299; S.III,159; IV,260; and is to be put away by insight DhsA.346. -- See further: D.III,234; A.III,438; IV,144 sq.; Kvu 81; Sn.950; Dhs.1003; and on term Dhs. trslⁿ § 1003; K.S.III,80, n. 3. --nirodha the destruction of the existing body or of individuality A.II,165 sq.; III,246; D.III,216. --samudaya the rise of individuality D.III,216; Nd¹ 109. (Page 660)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(sat+kāya, cp.BSk.satkāya),【阳】已存在的身体(the body in being, the existing body or group; individuality)。sakkāyadiṭṭhi,【阴】有身见，身见。DA.33./III,991.︰Sakkāyoti pañcupādānakkhandhā.( ‘有身’即五取蕴)。DA.33./III,988.︰Sati rūpādibhede kāye diṭṭhi, vijjamānā vā kāye diṭṭhīti sakkāyadiṭṭhi.(於‘色’等分离出来有身见，有身见存在的，为‘有身见’。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sakula: {'def': '[cp. Epic Sk. śakula] a kind of fish J.V,405. (Page 660)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sakumāra: {'def': '(adj.) [sa²+kumāra] of the same age; a playmate J.V,360, 366. (Page 660)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sakunta: {'def': '【阳】鸟。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. śakunta] a bird; a kind of vulture Sn.241; Dh.92, 174; J.IV,225; VI,272. (Page 660)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】鸟。(p308)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sakuntaka: {'def': '=sakunta Vin.I,137. (Page 660)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sakuṇa: {'def': '【阳】鸟。sakuṇagghī,【阳】鹰。sakuṇī,【阴】母鸟，母鹰。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic śakuna] a bird (esp. with ref. to augury) D.I,71 (pakkhin+); Vin.III,147; S.I,197; A.II,209; III,241 sq., 368; J.II,111, 162 (Kandagala); KhA 241. pantha° see under pantha. -- f. sakuṇī S.I,44. adj. sakuṇa J.V,503 (maṁsa).

--kulāvaka a bird’s nest KhA 56. --patha bird-course, Npl. Nd¹ 155. --pāda bird foot KhA 47. --ruta the cry of birds Miln.178. --vatta the habit (i. e. life) of a bird J.V,254. --vijjā bird craft, augury (i. e. understanding the cries of birds) D.I,9; DA.I,93. (Page 660)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】鸟。 ~gghī, 【阳】鹰。 ~ṇī, 【阴】母鸟。(p308)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sakuṇagghi: {'def': '(f.) [sakuṇa+°ghi, f. of °gha] a kind of hawk (lit. “bird-killer”) S.V,146; J.II,59; Miln.365. Cp. vyagghīnasa. (Page 660)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sakuṇaka: {'def': '=sakuṇa SnA 27. -- f. sakuṇikā D.I,91; Miln.202; J.I,171; IV,290. (Page 660)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sakuṇita: {'def': 'at PvA.123 read saṅkucita. (Page 660)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sakya: {'def': ': see Dictionary of Names. In cpd. °puttiya (belonging to the Sakya son) in general meaning of “a (true) follower of the Buddha,” A.IV,202; Vin.I,44; Ud.44; a° not a follower of the B. Vin.III,25. (Page 661)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】释迦族的。Sakyamuni,【阳】释迦牟尼(直译：释迦族的行者)。samaṇiyo sakyadhītaro, 释迦沙门尼。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'm. [= Sakka ②, Sk. Śakya] 釈迦, 釈氏, 釈族. -dhītā 釈女. -puṅgava 釈迦牡牛=釈迦牟尼. -putta 釈子, 釈迦族出身者, 釈迦牟尼. -puttiya 釈子所属. 釈氏の徒, 釈子の, 仏弟子, 仏教徒. -muni 釈迦牟尼. -rājan 釈迦王.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '【形】属于释迦族的。 ~muni, 【阳】释迦牟尼。(p309)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sakya-putta: {'def': '释子;释家族出生者[PS: =Sakya-puttiya(释子的;佛弟子;佛教徒)]', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Sakyamuni: {'def': '释迦牟尼;释家族的贤者;哲人', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '释迦牟尼，释迦文尼，奢迦夜牟尼', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Sakāsa: {'def': '【阳】邻近，出现。(p308)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】邻近，出现。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[sa³+k.=Sk. kāśa] presence; Acc. sakāsaṁ towards, to Sn.326; J.V,480; PvA.237; Loc. sakāse in the presence of, before J.III,24; IV,281; V,394; VI,282. (Page 660)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sakīya: {'def': '【形】自己的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】自己的。(p308)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Salabha: {'def': '[cp. Sk. śalabha] a moth J.V,401; Ud.72 (C.); VbhA.146. (Page 698)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】蠹，蚱蜢，蝗虫。(p334)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】蠹，蚱蜢，蝗虫。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Salakkhaṇa: {'def': '2 (sa1+lakkhaṇa﹐梵svalaksaṇa)【中】自己的特性(自相)。【反】共相(sāmañña-lakkhaṇa；梵sāmānya-laksaṇa)。《阿毘达磨大毘婆沙论》说：「分别一物相者，是分别自相；分别多物相者，是分别共相」(T27.217上)。自相是一法(心、心所、色)的各自的特相；共相，有为法(究竟名法及究竟真实色法(18完成色))的共同特相，即无常、苦、无我(包括：空)。《大毘婆沙论》卷三八(T27.196.3)说：「诸法自性，即是诸法自相。同类性是共相。」', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '1(sa3+lakkhaṇa﹐梵svalaksaṇa),【形】连同特性的(together with the characteristics)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】连同特性的。【中】自己的特性。(p334)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² (nt.) [sa¹+lakkhaṇa] own characteristic, that which is consistent with one’s own nature Miln.205; Nett 20. Opp. vilakkhaṇa. (Page 698)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (adj.) [sa³+lakkhaṇa] together with the characteristics Sn.1018. (Page 698)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Salana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. śal] moving, shaking VvA.169; DhsA.62 (in defⁿ of kusala as “kucchitānaṁ salan’ādīhi atthehi kusalaṁ”). (Page 698)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Salayati: {'def': '[Caus. of śal to leap] to shake DhsA.39. (Page 698)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Salaḷa: {'def': 'a kind of sweet-scented tree J.V,420; Bu II.51= J.I,13; Vv 35⁵; VvA.162; Miln.338; M.II,184. (Page 698)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Salila: {'def': 'Saliḷa,【中】【形】水。saliladhārā,【阴】阵雨，淋浴。salilatala ,【中】水面。salilaṁ āpo, 流动的水(flowing water)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】水。 ~dhārā, 【阴】阵雨，淋浴。(p334)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Sk. salila, to sarati1] water Sn.62, 319, 672; J i.8; v.169; VvA.41; PvA.157; Nd2 665 ("vuccati udakaŋ"); Miln.132 (written saliḷa); Sdhp.168. It is also adj. salilaŋ āpo flowing water J vi.534; cp. Miln.114: na tā nadiyo dhuva -- salilā.

-- dhārā shower of water Miln.117. -- vuṭṭhi id. Vism.234. (Page 699)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Salla: {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic śalya, cp. śalākā] an arrow, dart M i.429 (˚ŋ āharati to remove the a); ii.216; S iv.206; J i.180; v.49; Sn.331, 767; Miln.112; Vism.503 (visa˚ sting of poison; cp. VbhA.104 sallaŋ viya vitujjati); often metaphorically of the piercing sting of craving, evil, sorrow etc., e. g. antodosa˚ Miln.323; taṇhā˚ S i.40, 192; bhava˚ Dh.351; rāga˚ DhA iii.404; PvA.230; soka˚ Sn.985; Pv i.86; KhA 153. Cp. also D ii.283; Sn.51, 334, 938; J i.155; iii.157; DhA iv.70. At Nd1 59 seven such stings are given with rāga˚, dosa˚, moha˚, māna˚, diṭṭhi˚, soka˚, kathaṅkathā˚. -- abhūḷha˚ one whose sting of craving or attachment is pulled out D ii.283; Sn.593; J iii.390; Pv i.87 etc. (see abbūḷha). ‹-› Cp. vi˚.

-- katta [*kartṛ cp. Geiger P.Gr. § 90, 4] "one who works on the (poisoned) arrow," i. e. a surgeon M i.429; ii.216; Sn.562; It.101; Miln.110, 169; Vism.136 (in simile); KhA 21 (id.). The Buddha is the best surgeon: Sn.560; Miln.215. -- kattiya surgery D i.12 (T. ˚ka); DA. i.98. -- bandhana at Th.2, 347 take as salla+ bandhana "arrow & prison bond" (ThA.242 different). -- viddha pierced by an arrow Th.1, 967; Sn.331; cp. ruppati. -- santhana removal of the sting Dh.275 (=nimmathana abbāhana DhA iii.404). (Page 699)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Vedic walya, cp. walākā),【阳】箭(飞镳)，树桩，豪猪的刚毛，外科的工具(an arrow, dart)。antodosasalla﹐内瞋箭。abhūḷhasalla﹐箭。taṇhāsalla﹐渴爱箭。bhavasalla﹐有箭。Nd1 59 七箭：rāga﹐染箭。 dosasalla﹐瞋箭。mohasalla﹐痴箭。mānasalla﹐慢箭。diṭṭhisalla﹐见箭。sokasalla﹐愁箭。kathaṅkathāsalla﹐箭。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】飞镳，长钉，树桩，豪猪的刚毛，外科的工具。 ~ka, 【阳】豪猪，箭猪。 ~viddha, 【形】被飞镳刺穿的。(p334)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sallahuka: {'def': '【形】轻的，节俭的。(p334)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [saŋ+lahuka] light J i.277; ii.26; Vism.65; DhA iv.17; sallahukena nakkhattena on lucky nights J ii.278; sallahukavuttin whose wants are easily met, frugal Sn.144; DA. i.207. Sallāpa [saŋ+lāpa] conversation D i.89; A ii.182; J i.112, 189; Miln.94. Often in cpd. kathā & allāpa˚. (Page 699)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】轻的，节俭的，简朴的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sallaka: {'def': '[cp. *Sk. śalala & śallaka] a porcupine J v.489. (Page 699)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】豪猪、箭猪(a porcupine)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sallakatta: {'def': '【阳】外科医生。 ~kattiya, 【中】外科手术。(p334)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】外科医生。sallakattiya,【中】外科手术。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sallakkhaṇa: {'def': '【中】 sallakkhaṇā, 【阴】识别力，考虑。(p334)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】sallakkhaṇā,【阴】识别力，考虑。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sallakkhaṇā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. sallakkheti] discernment, testing Dhs.16, 292, 555; Pug.25; Vism.278; VbhA.254; DhsA.147; asallakkaṇa non-discernment S iii.261. (Page 699)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sallakkheti: {'def': '[saŋ+lakkheti] to observe, consider Vin i.48, 271; J i.123; ii.8; Vism.150; to examine J v.13; to bear in mind DhsA.110; J vi.566; to understand, realize, conclude, think over J iv.146; VvA.185; VbhA.53; asallakkhetvā without deliberation Vin ii.215; inadvertently J i.209. -- Caus. II. sallakkhāpeti to cause to be noted Mhvs 9, 24; DhsA.121; to persuade, bring to reason J vi.393. (Page 699)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+lakkh +e), 观察，考虑，想。【过】sallakkhesi。【过分】sallakkhita。【独】sallakkhetvā。【现分】sallakkhenta。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + lakkh + e), 观察，考虑。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~khita。【独】 ~khetvā。【现分】 ~khenta。(p334)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sallakkhita: {'def': '[pp. of sallakkheti] realized, thought DhA i.89. (Page 699)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sallakī: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Class. Sk. śallakī] the tree Boswellia thurifera (incense tree) J iv.92; pl. ˚ -- iyo J vi.535; bahu- kuṭaja -- sallakika Th.1, 115 (=indasālarukkha [?]). (Page 699)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cp. Class. Sk. wallakī),【阴】橄榄科植物乳香木(Boswellia thurifera 或Boswellia sacra)产出的含有挥发油的香味树脂「乳香」(frankincense)，古代用於宗教祭典，也当作熏香料(制造熏香、精油的原料)使用。乳香也是中药的一种外科和内科药材，用於止痛、化瘀、活血。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sallapana: {'def': '【中】说话。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】说话。(p334)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sallapati: {'def': '(san+lap唠叨+a), 交谈，与…交谈。【过】sallapi。【现分】sallapanta。【独】sallapitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(san + lap + a), 交谈，与…交谈。【过】 ~lapi。【现分】 ~panta。【独】 ~pitvā。(p334)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saŋ+lapati] to talk (with) D i.90; ii.109; Miln.4; sallapeti the same Vin iv.14. Sallalīkata pierced, perforated J i.180. Trenckner suggests that this form may have arisen from *sallakīkata (from sallaka, porcupine). (Page 699)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sallaviddha: {'def': '【形】被箭(飞镳)刺穿的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sallekha: {'def': '【阳】削减(effacement)，严峻的忏悔(austere penance)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】严峻的忏悔，操行上一丝不苟的苦修。(p334)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. saṁ+likh] austere penance, the higher life M i.13, 40; Vin i.305; Ps.i.102, 103; Pug.69 sq.; DA. i.82; Vism.69; Miln.360, 380; adj. Vin i.45; sallekhitācāra practising austere penance Miln.230, 244, 348 sq.; ˚vutti Vin ii.197; Vism.65 (˚vuttitā). Cp. abhi˚. (Page 699)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sallekha-dhamma: {'def': '俭约法[PS: sallekha(saṁ-likh) 损减;渐损;俭约;制欲;严肃; sallekha pariyāya 削减之法门;俭约之教示; sallekha vihāra 严肃住; sallekha vuttin 损减行者;严肃生活者]', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Sallekhatā: {'def': '(f.)=sallekha D iii.115; Vism.53. (Page 699)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sallikhati: {'def': '(saṁ+likh抓+a), 切片。【过】sallikhi。【过分】sallikhita。【独】sallikhitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + likh + a), 切片。【过】 ~khi。【过分】 ~khita。【独】~khitvā。(p334)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sallitta: {'def': '[saŋ+litta] smeared (with) Th.1, 1175 (mīḷha˚). (Page 699)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sallāpa: {'def': '【阳】友好的谈话。(p334)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】友好的谈话。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sallīna: {'def': '[sallīyati隐退] 的【过分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saŋ+līna] sluggish, cowering D ii.255; asallīna active, upright, unshaken D ii.157; S i.159; iv.125; Cp. v.68. paṭi˚. (Page 699)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sallīyanā: {'def': '【阴】迟钝，隔离。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】迟钝，隔离。(p334)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) stolidity Dhs.1156, 1236. (Page 699)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sallīyati: {'def': '(saṁ+lī执著+ya), 隐退。【过】sallīyi。【独】sallīyitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + lī + ya), 隐退。【过】 ~līyi。【独】 ~yitvā。(p334)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Salābha: {'def': "[sa⁴+lābha] one's own advantage Dh.365. (Page 699)", 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】自己的利益。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】自己的利益。(p334)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Salāka: {'def': '(Sk.syāla+ka)﹐夫或妻的兄弟(a brother-in-law)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Salākā: {'def': '【阴】草叶，伞骨，外科的工具，木片票，很多。 ~vutta, 【形】以票换取食物生存。 ~kagga, 【中】配票房。 ~gāha, 【阳】取票，取选票。 ~gāhāpaka, 【阳】选票的分发者。 ~bhatta, 【中】以票换取的食物。(p334)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】草叶，伞骨，手术用的工具，筹，木片。salākavutta,【形】以木片的食物维生。salākakagga,【中】分木片(或筹)房。salākagāha,【阳】取票(筹)，取选票。salākagāhāpaka,【阳】选票的分发者。salākabhatta(=niccadāna常施﹐(AA.4.39.)),【中】以木片(木瓢)分发食物。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. Vedic śalākā] 1. an arrow, a dart A iv.107 (T. has it as nt.). -- 2. a small stick, peg, thin bar S iv.168; Dāvs iv.51. -- 3. blade of a grass M i.79; J i.439. -- 4. ribs of a parasol Vin iv.338; SnA 487; Miln.226. -- 5. a pencil, small stick (used in painting the eyes with collyrium) Vin i.204; J iii.419 (añjana˚). ‹-› 6. a kind of needle Vin ii.116. -- 7. a kind of surgical instrument, a stick of caustic Miln.112, 149. -- 8. a gong stick (of bronze, loha˚) J ii.342; Vism.283. -- 9. membrum virile J ii.359. -- 10. a ticket consisting of slips of wood used in voting and distributing food, vote, lot Vin ii.99, 176, 306; J i.123; PvA.272 (kāḷakaṇṇi˚); salākaŋ gaṇhāti to take tickets (in order to vote or to be counted) Vin i.117; ii.199; paṭhaman salākaŋ gaṇhanto taking the first vote, first rate A i.24; salākaŋ gāheti to issue tickets, to take a vote Vin ii.205; salākaŋ dadāti to issue tickets J i.123; salākaŋ vāreti to throw lots J i.239 (kāḷakaṇṇi˚).

-- agga room for distributing food by tickets J i.123; Mhvs 15, 205. -- odhāniya a case for the ointment -- stick Vin i.204. -- gāha taking of votes, voting Vin ii.85, 98 sq. (3 kinds). -- gāhāpaka ticket -- issuer, taker of voting tickets Vin ii.84. -- bhatta food to be distributed by tickets Vin i.58, 96; ii.175; J i.123; DhA i.53 (eight kinds). -- vātapāna a window made with slips of wood Vin ii.148. -- vutta "subsisting on blades of grass" (or "by means of food tickets"?) Vin iii.6, 67; iv.23; A i.160; S iv.323. Cp. BSk. śalākāvṛtti Divy 131. -- hattha brush -- hand, a kind of play, where the hand is dipped in lac or dye and used as a brush (?) D i.65; DA. i.85. (Page 699)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Salāṭu: {'def': 'salāṭuka,【形】未熟的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'salāṭuka, 【形】未熟的。(p334)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Salāṭuka: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. *Sk. śalāṭu] fresh, unripe S i.150= Sn.p. 125; Miln.334; VvA.288. (Page 699)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sama: {'def': '³ (adj.) [Vedic sama, fr. sa²; see etym. under saṁ°] 1. even, level J.I,315; III,172; Mhvs 23, 51. samaṁ karoti to level Dh.178; SnA 66. Opp. visama. -- 2. like, equal, the same D.I,123, 174; S.I,12; Sn.90, 226, 799, 842; It.17, 64; Dh.306; Miln.4. The compared noun is put in the Instr.; or precedes as first part of cpd. ‹-› 3. impartial, upright, of even mind, just A.I,74, 293 sq.; Sn.215, 468, 952. -- 4. sama°, foll. by numerals, means “altogether,”. e. g. °tiṁsa thirty altogether Bu 18, 18. -- 5. Cases as adv.: Instr. samena with justice, impartially (=dhammena K.S. I.321) Dh.257; J.I,180; Acc. samaṁ equally D.II,166; together with, at, D.II,288; Mhvs 11, 12.

--cāga equally liberal A.II,62. --jana an ordinary man, common people M.III,154=Vin.I,349. --jātika of the same caste J.I,68. --jīvitā regular life, living economically A.IV,281 sq. --tala level, even J.I,7; Pv IV.12¹ (of a pond). --dhāraṇa equal support or sustenance SnA 95. --dhura carrying an equal burden, equal J.I,191; asamadhura incomparable Sn.694 sq.; J.I,193. But sama-dhura-ggahaṇa “complete imperiousness” VbhA.492 (see yugaggāha). --vāhita evenly borne along (of equanimity) DhsA.133. --vibhatta in equal shares J.I,266. --sama exactly the same D.I,123; II,136; Pug.64; Miln.410; DA.I,290. --sīsin a kind of puggala, lit. “equal-headed,” i. e. one who simultaneously attains an end of craving and of life (cp. PugA 186. The explⁿ in J.P.T.S. 1891, 5 is wrong) Pug.13; Nett 190. --sūpaka with equal curry (when the curry is in quantity of onefourth of the rice) Vin.IV,190. (Page 681)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1 (‹sam(梵wam)安静、平息: see sammati1)﹐【阳】平静，宁静(calmness, tranquillity, mental quiet)。samaṁ carati﹐平静下来(to become calm, quiescent)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [fr. śram: see sammati²] fatigue J.VI,565. (Page 681)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】平坦的，相等的，齐平的，相似的。【阳】平静，宁静。 ~ka,【形】相等的，相似的，相同的。 ~maŋ,【副】平均地，相等地。 ~mena,【副】公平地，无私地。(p321)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '3 (Vedic sama, fr. sa2; see etym. under saṁ°)【形】1.平坦的，齐平的(even, level；samaṁ karoti=弄平(to level))。2.相似的，相等的(like, equal, the same)。3.不偏不倚的,公正的(impartial, upright, of even mind, just)。4.samasama+ (数字), 总共(“altogether,”. e.g. samatiṁsa thirty altogether)。samaka,【形】相等的，相似的，相同的。samaṁ,【副】平均地，相等地(equally; together with, at.)。samana,【副】公平地，无私地(with justice, impartially (samena =dhammena))。opp. visama(不平的)。\xa0--samacāga equally liberal. --samajana an ordinary man, common people. --samajātika of the same caste. --samajīvitā regular life, living economically sq. --samatala level, even (of a pond). --samadhāraṇa equal support or sustenance. --samadhura carrying an equal burden, equal; asamadhura incomparable; But sama-dhura-ggahaṇa “complete imperiousness” (see yugaggāha). --samavāhita evenly borne along (of equanimity). --samavibhatta in equal shares. --samasama exactly the same. --samasīsin a kind of puggala, lit. “equal-headed,” i. e. one who simultaneously attains an end of craving and of life) 。samasūpaka, 成比例地接受与咖哩(或食物)(with equal curry (when the curry is in quantity of onefourth of the rice))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '2 (‹wam: see sammati2)﹐疲劳(fatigue)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [fr. śam: see sammati¹] calmness, tranquillity, mental quiet Sn.896. samaṁ carati to become calm, quiescent J.IV,172. Cp. °cariyā & °cārin. (Page 681)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samabbhāhata: {'def': '[saṁ+abbhāhata] struck, beaten (thoroughly) Vism.153; DA.I,140. (Page 683)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samabhijānāti: {'def': '[saṁ+abhijānati] to recollect, to know J.VI,126. (Page 683)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samabhisiñcati: {'def': '[saṁ+abhisiñcati] to inaugurate as a king Mhvs 4, 6; V,14. (Page 683)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samabhisāta: {'def': 'joyful Th.2, 461. (Page 683)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samacariyā: {'def': '[sama¹+cariyā] (f.) living in spiritual calm, quietism A.I,55; S.I,96, 101 sq.; It.16, 52; Dh.388; Miln.19; J.VI,128; DhA.IV,145. (Page 682)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】精神的平静，寂静主义。(p321)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】精神的平静，寂静主义。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samacchati: {'def': '[saṁ+acchati] to sit down together J.II,67 (samacchare); IV,356; VI,104, 127. (Page 682)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samacchidagatta: {'def': '(adj.) [sam+ā+chida+gatta] with mangled limbs Sn.673. (Page 682)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samacitta: {'def': '【形】沉着的。 ~tā, 【阴】平等心。(p321)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】沉著的。samacittatā,【阴】平等心。samacittādevatā﹐心意相等的诸天。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'possessed of equanimity A.I,65; IV,215; SnA 174 (°paṭipadā-sutta). (Page 682)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samacāga: {'def': '[sama³+cāga] equally liberal A.II,62. (Page 682)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samacārin: {'def': '(śama-) living in peace M.I,289. (Page 682)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samadhigacchati: {'def': '[saṁ+adhigacchati] to attain Th.1, 4; aor. samajjhagā It.83; 3^rd pl. samajjhagaṁ S.I,103. (Page 683)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saŋ + adhi + gam + a), 达到，清楚地了解。【过】 ~cchi。【过分】 ~gata。【独】 ~gantvā。(p322)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+adhi+gam去+a), 达到，清楚地了解。【过】samadhigacchi。【过分】samadhigata。【独】samadhigantvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samadhigaṇhāti: {'def': '[saṁ+adhigaṇhāti] 1. to reach, to get, obtain; ger. samadhiggayha M.I,506; II,25; S.I,86= It.16. -- 2. to exceed, surpass, to overcome, to master J.VI,261 (pañhaṁ samadhiggahetvā). Often confounded with samatigaṇhāti. (Page 683)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samadhosi: {'def': 'variant reading S.III,120 sq.; IV,46; the form is aor. of saṁdhū. See sañcopati. (Page 683)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samagga: {'def': '(adj.) [saṁ+agga] being in unity, harmonious M.II,239; D.III,172; A.II,240; V,74 sq.; plur.=all unitedly, in common Vin.I,105; J.VI,273¹. A.I,70=243; Sn.281, 283; Dh.194; Th.2, 161; ThA.143; J.I,198, 209; samaggakaraṇa making for peace D.I,4=A.II,209 =Pug.57; DA.I,74; samagganandin, samaggarata, and samaggārāma, rejoicing in peace, delighting in peace, impassioned for peace D.I,4=A.II,209=Pug.57; DA.I,74; samaggavāsa dwelling in concord J.I,362; II,27. -- samaggi-karoti to harmonize, to conciliate D.III,161. -- Cp. sāmaggī etc. (Page 681)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】团结的，同道的，一致的，和合的，结交的，和谐的(台语ho5 hai5 e)。samaggakaraṇa,【中】调解人，和事佬。samaggatta,【中】协定，团结的情况。samaggarata, samaggārāma,【形】对和平的欢喜。【反】asamsagga﹐asaṁsagga。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】团结的，同道的，一致的。 ~karaṇa, 【中】调解人，和事佬。 ~tta, 【中】协议，团结的情况。 ~rata, ~ārāma, 【形】对和平的欢喜。(p321)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samaggatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. samagga] agreement, consent Vin.I,316. (Page 681)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samajja: {'def': '【中】厌祝的聚集，剧场的展览。 ~ṭṭhāna,【中】竞技场。 ~abhicaraṇa,【中】参观展览会，参观节日。(p321)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Epic Sk. samāja (fr. saṁ+aj) congregation, gathering, company] a festive gathering, fair; a show, theatrical display. Originally a mountain cult, as it was esp. held on the mountains near Rājagaha. ‹-› J.II,13; III,541; VI,277, 559; S.V,170; DA.I,84; DhA.IV,59; DhsA.255. -- On character and history of the festival see Hardy, Album Kern pp. 61--66. -- gir-aggasamajjaṁ mountain fair Vin.II,107, 150; IV,85, 267, 360; DhA.I,89, 113. samajjaṁ karoti or kāreti to hold high revel J.VI,383.

--âbhicaraṇa visiting fairs D.III,183. --ṭṭhāna the place of the festival, the arena, Vin.II,150; J.I,394; --dāna giving festivals Miln.278; --majjhe on the arena S.IV,306 sq.; J.III,541; --maṇḍala the circle of the assembly J.I,283 sq. (Page 682)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】厌祝的聚集，剧场。samajjaṭṭhāna,【中】竞技场。samajjābhicaraṇa,【中】涉足剧场，参观展览会，参观节日。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samajjhagaṁ: {'def': '(B °-guṁ) aor. from sam-adhi-gā. (See samadhigacchati.) (Page 682)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samajātika: {'def': '【形】同阶级的（相同的印度世袭阶级）。(p321)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】同阶级的(相同的印度世袭阶级)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samajīvita: {'def': '共命。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samaka: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. BSk. samaka Divy 585] equal, like, same Miln.122, 410; of the same height (of a seat) Vin.II,169. samakaṁ (adv.) equally Miln.82. (Page 681)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samakkhāta: {'def': '[saṁ+akkhāta] counted, known Sdhp.70, 458. (Page 681)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+akkhāta)已计算(counted)，已知(known)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samala: {'def': '【形】不纯的，污染的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [BSk. samala] impure, contaminated Vin.I,5; samalā (f.) dustbin S.II,270 (=gāmato gūthanikkhamana-magga, i. e sewer K.S. II.203); see sandhi°. (Page 684)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】不纯的，污染的。(p323)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samalaṅkaroti: {'def': '(saŋ + alaŋ + kar + o), 装饰。【过】 ~kari。【独】 ~karitvā。(p323)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+alaṅkaroti] to decorate, adorn Mhvs 7, 56; °kata pp. Dāvs.V,36: °karitvā J.VI,577. (Page 684)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+alaṁ+kar行+o), 装饰。【过】samalaṅkari。【独】samalaṅkaritvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samalaṅkata: {'def': '(Samalaṅkaroti的【过分】) 装饰。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. śam] suppression Mhvs 4, 35. (Page 683)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samanaka: {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+mana+ka] endowed with mind A.II,48 (text, samaṇaka); S.I,62. (Page 683)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samanantara: {'def': '【形】立即的，最近的。samanantarā,【副】在…之后就。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [saṁ+anantara] immediate; usually in Abl. (as adv.); samanantarā immediately, after, just after D.II,156; Vin.I,56; rattibhāga-samanantare at midnight J.I,101.

--paccaya the relation of immediate contiguity Tikp 3, 61 sq.; Dukp 26; Vism.534. (Page 683)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】立即的，最近的。 ~tarā,【副】在…之后就。(p322)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samandhakāra: {'def': '[saṁ+andhakāra] the dark of night Vin.IV,54; DhA.II,94; S.III,60. (Page 683)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samannesanā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. last] search, examination M.I,317. (Page 683)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samannesati: {'def': '[saṁ+anvesati] to seek, to look for, to examine D.I,105; S.III,124; IV,197; Miln.37; DA.I,274. pres. also samanvesati S.I,122. (Page 683)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samannāgata: {'def': '(adj.) [saṁ+anvāgata] followed by, possessed of, endowed with (Instr.) D.I,50; 88 Vin.I,54; Sn.p. 78, 102, 104. SnA 177 (in explⁿ of ending “--in”), 216 (of “--mant”); PvA.46, 73. -- nt. abstr. °annāgatatta PvA.49. (Page 683)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】具有的，持有的。(p322)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】具有的，持有的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samannāharati: {'def': '(saŋ + anu + ā + har + a), 收集。【过】 ~hari。【过分】~haṭa。【独】 ~haritvā。(p322)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+anu随+ā+har拿+a), 集中、采集(concentration, bringing together)。【过】samannāhari。【过分】samannāhaṭa。【独】samannāharitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+anu+āharati; cp. BSk. samanvāharati] 1. to concentrate the mind on, to consider, reflect D.II,204; M.I,445; A.III,162 sq., 402 sq.; S.I,114. -- 2. to pay respect to, to honour M.II,169; Vin.I,180. (Page 683)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samannāhata: {'def': '[saṁ+anvāhata] struck (together), played upon D.II,171. (Page 683)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samannāhāra: {'def': '[saṁ+anu+āhāra] concentration, bringing together M.I,190 sq.; DA.I,123; Miln.189. (Page 683)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samannāneti: {'def': '[samanvā+nī] to lead, conduct properly, control, pres. sam-anv-āneti M.III,188; ppr. °annānayamāna M.I,477. (Page 683)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samanta: {'def': '(saṁ+anta),【形】全部的(all)，整个的(entire)。samantacakkhu,【形】普眼者(佛陀五眼之一，无所不见的all-seeing, an epithet of the Buddha M I.168= Vin I.5; Sn.345, etc.; Miln 111; Nd1 360)( SA.6.1./I,200.︰sabbaññutaññāṇassa “samantacakkhū”ti。SA.35.1./II,354.︰Samantacakkhu nāma sabbaññutaññāṇaṁ, yaṁ--“pāsādamāruyha samantacakkhū”ti (Mahāvaṁsa 8；M.26./I,168;M.85./II,94.)。samantapāsādika,【形】普端严(令所有的人喜爱的all-pleasing, quite serene)。samantabhaddaka,【形】完全吉兆的(complete auspiciousness, perfect loveliness )。间接作副词用：Acc. Samantaṁ(completely); Abl.samantā & samantato; Instr. Samantena。sāmanta-jappā,(以)邻近(之语暗示)，(以)求取(布施)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [saṁ+anta “of complete ends”] all, entire Sn.672; Miln.3. occurs usually in oblique cases, used adverbially, e. g. Acc. samantaṁ completely Sn.442; Abl. samantā (D.I,222; J.II,106; Vin.I,32) & samantato (M.I,168=Vin.I,5; Mhvs 1, 29; Vism.185; and in definitions of prefix pari° DA.I,217; VvA.236; PvA.32); Instr. samantena (Th.2, 487) on all sides, everywhere, anywhere; also used as prepositions; thus, samantā Vesāliṁ, everywhere in Vesāli D.II,98; samantato nagarassa all round the city Mhvs 34, 39; samāsamantato everywhere DA.I,61.

--cakkhu all-seeing, an epithet of the Buddha M.I,168= Vin.I,5; Sn.345, etc.; Miln.111; Nd¹ 360. --pāsādika all-pleasing, quite serene A.I,24; °kā Buddhaghosa’s commentary on the Vinaya Piṭaka DA.I,84; --bhaddakatta complete auspiciousness, perfect loveliness SnA 444; VbhA.132. --rahita entirely gone J.I,29. --veda one whose knowledge (of the Veda) is complete J.VI,213. (Page 683)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】全部的，整个的。 ~cakkhu, 【形】普眼者（佛陀，无所不见的）。 ~pāsādika, 【形】普端严（令所有的人喜爱的）。 ~bhaddaka,【形】完全吉兆的。(p322)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samantapāsādikā: {'def': 'f. 一切善見, 善見律毘婆沙 [律蔵の註釈] VA.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': 'f. 一切善見, 善見律毘婆沙 [律蔵的註釋] VA.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》李瑩譯词数 708.'}

Samantā: {'def': 'samantato, 【副】周围，各处。(p322)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'samantato,【副】周围，各处。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samanubandhati: {'def': '[saṁ+anubandhati] to pursue Mhvs 10, 5. (Page 683)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samanubhāsanā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. last] conversation, repeating together Vin.III,174 sq.; IV,236 sq. (Page 683)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】会话，排练。(p322)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】会话，排练。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samanubhāsati: {'def': '(saṁ+anu随+bhās +a), 交谈、同学(to converse or study together)。【过】samanubhāsi。asamanubhāsati, 非同学。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+anubhāsati] to converse or study together D.I,26, 163; M.I,130; A.I,138; V,156 sq.; Vin.III,173 sq.; IV,236 sq.; DA.I,117. (Page 683)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saŋ + anu + bhās + a), 交谈。【过】 ~bhāsi。(p322)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samanugāhati: {'def': '(saŋ + anu + gah + a), 要求理由。【过】 ~gāhi。【独】~gāhitvā。(p322)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+anugāhati] to ask for reasons, to question closely D.I,26; M.I,130; A.V,156 sq.; ppr. med. samanuggāhiyamāna being pressed M.I,130; A.V,156; Vin.III,91. (Page 683)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+anu随+gah拿+a), 要求理由。【过】samanugāhi。【独】samanugāhitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samanujānāti: {'def': '[saṁ+anujānāti] to approve; samanujānissanti (fut. 3 pl.) M.I,398; S.IV,225; pp. samanuññāta approved, allowed Mhvs 8, 11; aor. 1 sg. samanuññāsin J.IV,117 (=samanuñño āsiṁ Com. ib. 117¹⁵). (Page 683)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samanukkamati: {'def': '[saṁ+anukkamati] to walk along together J.III,373. (Page 683)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samanumaññati: {'def': '[saṁ+anumaññati] to approve; fut. 3 pl. °maññissanti M.I,398; S.IV,225; aor. 3 pl. °maññiṁsu J.IV,134. (Page 683)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samanumodati: {'def': '[saṁ+anumodati] to rejoice at, to approve M.I,398; S.IV,225; Miln.89. (Page 683)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samanupassanā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. last] considering S.III,44; Nett 27. (Page 683)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹samanupassati),【阴】考虑(considering)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samanupassati: {'def': '(saṁ+anu随+dis指出+a), 看、见、察觉、认定(to see, perceive, regard)。【过】samanupassi。【现分】samanupassanta﹐samanupassamāna。【独】samanussitvā。【不】samanupassituṁ。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+anupassati] to see, perceive, regard D.I,69, 73; II,198; M.I,435 sq.; II,205; Pot. Vin.II,89; ppr. °passanto J.I,140; ppr. med. °passamāno D.II,66; inf. °passituṁ Vin.I,14; rūpaṁ attato samanupassati to regard form as self S.III,42. (Page 683)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saŋ + anu + dis + a), 看，察觉。【过】 ~passi。【现分】~samāna。【独】 ~sitvā。(p322)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samanussarati: {'def': '(saṁ+anu随+sar(梵sr)动转+a), 回忆，想起。【过】samanussari。【现分】samanussranta。【独】samanussaritvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saṁ+anussarati) to recollect, call to mind S.IV,196; Vin.II,183. (Page 683)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saŋ + anu + sar + a), 回忆，想起。【过】 ~sari。【现分】~ranta。【独】 ~saritvā。(p322)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samanuyuñjati: {'def': '(saṁ+anu随+yuj连接+ṁ-a), 盘诘，反复询问。【过】samanuyuñji。【独】samanuyuñjitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + anu + yuj + ŋ-a), 盘诘，反复询问。【过】 ~ñji。【独】~jitvā。(p322)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+anuyuñjati] to cross-question D.I,26, 163; M.I,130; A.I,138; V,156; DA.I,117. (Page 683)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samanuñña: {'def': '【形】满意的。 ~ññā, 【阴】赞成。 ~ñāta, 【形】核准的，允许的。(p322)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】满意的。samanuññā,【阴】赞成。samanuññāta,【形】核准的，允许的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [=next] approving D.III,271; A.II,253; III,359; V,305; S.I,1, 153; IV,187; J.IV,117. (Page 683)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samanuññā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. samanujānāti] approval S.I,1; M.I,359. (Page 683)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samapatti: {'def': '【阴】达到，入定。(p324)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samapekkhati: {'def': '(saŋ + āpe + ikkh + a), 考虑得好。【过】 ~pekkhi。(p322)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+āpe+ikkh见+a), 考虑得好。【过】samappekkhi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+apekkhati] to consider, ger. ekkhiya Sdhp.536; cp. samavekkh°. (Page 683)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samapekkhaṇa: {'def': '(nt.) considering; a° S.III,261. (Page 683)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samappeti: {'def': '[saṁ+appeti] to hand over, consign, commit, deposit, give Mhvs 7, 72; 19, 30; 21, 21; 34, 21; Dāvs II.64. -- pp. samappita. (Page 683)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saŋ + ap + e), 移交，委托，应用。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~ppita。【独】 ~etvā, ~ppiya。(p323)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+ap+e), 移交，委托，应用。【过】samappesi。【过分】samappita。【独】samappetvā, samappiya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samappita: {'def': '[pp. of samappeti] 1. made over, consigned Dh.315; Sn.333; Th.2, 451. -- 2. endowed with (-°), affected with, possessed of J.V,102 (kaṇṭakena); Pv IV.1⁶ (=allīna PvA.265); PvA.162 (soka-salla°-hadaya); Vism.303 (sallena). --yasabhoga° possessed of fame & wealth Dh.303; dukkhena afflicted with pain Vv 52³; pañcehi kāmaguṇehi s. endowed with the 5 pleasures of the senses D.I,36, 60; Vin.I,15; DA.I,121. (Page 683)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samara: {'def': '[sa+mara] battle Dāvs.IV,1 (Page 684)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】战争。(p323)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】战争。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samassasati: {'def': '[saṁ+assasati] to be refreshed J.I,176; Caus. samassāseti to relieve, refresh J.I,175. (Page 684)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samassattha: {'def': '[saṁ+assattha²] refreshed, relieved J.III,189. (Page 684)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samassita: {'def': '[saṁ+assita] leaning towards Th.1, 525. (Page 684)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samassāsa: {'def': '【阳】（痛苦等的）减轻，心旷神怡。(p323)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+assāsa] refreshing, relief DhsA.150 (explⁿ of passaddhi). (Page 684)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】(痛苦等的)减轻，心旷神怡。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samassāseti: {'def': '(saṁ+ā+sas+e), 减轻，使精神振作。【过】samassāsesi。【独】samassāsetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + ā + sas + e), 减轻，使精神振作。【过】 ~esi。【独】~setvā。(p323)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samasāyisun: {'def': '(aor.) J.III,201 (text, samāsāsisuṁ, cp. J.P.T.S. 1885, 60; read taṁ asāyisuṁ). (Page 684)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samatha: {'def': '[fr. śam, cp. BSk. śamatha] 1. calm, quietude of heart M.I,33; A.I,61, 95; II,140; III,86 sq. (ceto°), 116 sq., 449; IV,360; V,99; D.III,54, 213, 273; DhA.II,177; S.IV,362; Dhs.11, 15, 54; cessation of the Saṅkhāras S.I,136; III,133; A.I,133; Sn.732; Vin.I,5. ‹-› 2. settlement of legal questions (adhikaraṇa) Vin.II,93; IV,207; cp. DhsA.144; s. paṭivijjhati Pts.I,180.

--yānika who makes quietude his vehicle, devoted to quietude, a kind of Arahant; cp. Geiger, Saṁyutta trslⁿ II.172. --vipassanā introspection (“auto-hypnosis” Cpd. 202) for promoting calm [cp. śamatha-vipaśyanā Divy 95] S.V,52; A.II,157; DhA.IV,140; also separately “calm & intuition,” e. g. M.I,494. (Page 682)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】定，平静，心的寂静，法律问题的解决。 ~bhāvanā, 【阴】修定。(p322)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(wam平息、安静+-atha名词语基),【阳】奢摩他(将心专注於一个对象，培育专注力而变得宁静)，止禅，平静，心的寂静，法律问题的解决。samatthabhāvanā,【阴】修定。ajjhatta-ceto-samatha﹐【阳】内止，内心寂止。DhsA.CS:p.95、175︰Kāmacchandādayo paccanīkadhamme sametīti samatho. (平息慾欲(盖)等(五)盖，为‘止’，或‘三摩地’ ) Aniccādivasena vividhehi ākārehi dhamme passatīti vipassanā. (观看无常等种种行相，为‘观’，或‘毘钵舍那’。Dhs.A(CS:p.188~9)：Samathoti tividho samatho--1cittasamatho, 2adhikaraṇasamatho, 3sabbasaṅkhārasamathoti. Tattha aṭṭhasu samāpattīsu cittekaggatā cittasamatho nāma. Tañhi āgamma cittacalanaṁ cittavipphanditaṁ sammati vūpasammati, tasmā so cittasamathoti vuccati. Sammukhāvinayādisattavidho samatho adhikaraṇasamatho nāma. Tañhi āgamma tāni tāni adhikaraṇāni sammanti vūpasammanti, tasmā so adhikaraṇasamathoti vuccati. Yasmā pana sabbe saṅkhārā nibbānaṁ āgamma sammanti vūpasammanti, tasmā taṁ sabbasaṅkhārasamathoti vuccati.(奢摩他︰有三种奢摩他︰(1)心奢摩他、(2)止诤奢摩他、(3)一切行奢摩他。此中八种三摩钵地一境性之名。心的激动、心的翻腾中来，平息和寂静，因此称为‘心奢摩他’。「现前毘尼」(Sammukhāvinaya)等七种奢摩他，名为‘止诤奢摩他’，於此中来，在在处处平息和寂静，因此称为‘止诤奢摩他’。然而，因为一切行涅盘而来，平息和寂静，因此称为‘一切行奢摩他’。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samatiggaṇhāti: {'def': '[saṁ+ati+gṛh] to stretch over, rise above, to reach beyond J.IV,411 (ger. samatiggayha). (Page 682)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samatikkama: {'def': '【阳】 samatikkamana, 【中】超越，克服。(p322)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】samatikkamana,【中】超越，克服。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [saṁ+atikamma] passing beyond, overcoming D.I,34; II,290; M.I,41, 455; Vin.I,3; J.V,454; Vism.111. (Page 682)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samatikkamati: {'def': '[saṁ+atikkamati] to cross over, to transcend D.I,35; to elapse Mhvs 13, 5; ger. samatikkamma D.I,35; M 41; pp. samatikkanta crossed over, or escaped from S.III,80; Dh.195. (Page 682)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saŋ + ati + kam + a), 越过，渡过，超越，除去。【过】~kami。【独】 ~kamitvā。(p322)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+ati超越+kam(梵kram)超越+a), 越过，渡过，超越，除去。【过】samatikkami。【独】samatikkamitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samatikkanta: {'def': '(samatikkamati 的【过分】)。(p322)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(samatikkamati 的【过分】)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samatimaññti: {'def': '[saṁ+atimaññti] to despise (aor.) samatimaññi Th.2, 72. (Page 682)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samatittha: {'def': '(adj.) [sama³+tittha] with even banks (of a pond) J.V,407. (Page 682)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samatitthika: {'def': '(adj.) [sama³+tittha+ika] even or level with the border or bank, i. e. quite full, brimful D.I,244; II,89; M.I,435; II,7=Miln.213; S.II,134; V,170; J.I,400; J.I,235, 393; Miln.121; Vism.170 (pattaṁ °tittikaṁ pūretvā; v. l. °titthikaṁ); A.III,403; Vin.I,230; IV,190; often written °tittika and °tittiya. [The form is probably connected with samaicchia-i. e. samaitthia (*samatisthita) in the Deśināmamālā VIII,20 (Konow). Compare, however, Rhys Davids’Buddhist Suttas, p. 178¹; °-aṁ buñjāmi Miln.213; “I eat (only just) to the full” (opp. to bhiyyo bhuñjāmi) suggests the etymology: sama-titti+ka. Kern, Toev. s. v. as above.] (Page 682)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samatittika: {'def': '【形】盈满的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】盈满的。(p322)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samativattati: {'def': '(saŋ + ati + vat + a), 克服，超越。【过】 ~vatti。【过分】 ~vatta,~vattita。(p322)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+ativattati] to transcend, overcome Sn.768, cp. Nd¹ 10. (Page 682)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+ati超越+vat(vrt)使转动+a), 克服，超越。【过】samativatti。【过分】samativatta, samativattita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samativijjhati: {'def': '[saṁ+ativijjhati] to penetrate Dh.13= Th.1, 133. (Page 682)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samatta: {'def': '【中】平等，平均，平衡，正常状态。参考 Samatā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】参考 Samatā。(p322)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² [cp. Sk. samāpta, pp. of saṁ+āp] 1. accomplished, brought to an end A.II,193; Sn.781=paripuṇṇa Nd¹ 65. -- 2. [cp. Sk. samasta, pp. of saṁ+as to throw, cp. BSk. samasta, e. g. Jtm XXXI.90] complete, entire, perfect Miln.349; Sn.881; 1000; Nd¹ 289, 298. samattaṁ completely S.V,175; accomplished, full Sn.889. (Page 682)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】完成的，整个的。(p322)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [abstr. fr. sama³] equality A.III,359; Mhvs 3, 7; equanimity, justice A.I,75. (Page 682)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】完成的，整个的，全分的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samattha: {'def': '【形】能干的，有技术的。 ~tā, 【阴】能力，精通。(p322)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Sk. samartha, saṁ+artha] able, strong J.I,179; 187; SnA 143. (Page 682)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】能干的，有技术的。samatthatā,【阴】能力，精通。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samatthi: {'def': '(sama相等的+atthi有), 有相等的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samatthita: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Sk. samarthita, saṁ+pp. of arthayati] unravelling Miln.1. (Page 682)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samatthiya: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. samattha] able Sdhp.619. (Page 682)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samatā: {'def': '[fr. sama³] equality, evenness, normal state Vin.I,183; A.III,375 sq.; Miln.351. (Page 682)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】平等，平均，正常状态。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】平等，平均，正常状态。(p322)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samavadhāna: {'def': '(nt.) concurrence, co-existence Nett 79. (Page 684)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samavasarati: {'def': 'of a goad or spur Th.2, 210. See samosarati. (Page 684)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samavattakkhandha: {'def': '(adj.) [sama+vatta+kh., but BSk. sasaṁvṛtta°] having the shoulders round, one of the lakkhaṇas of a Buddha D.II,18; III,144, 164; Dial. II.15: “his bust is equally rounded.” (Page 684)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samavattasaṁvāsa: {'def': '[sama+vatta¹+saṁvāsa] living together with the same duties, on terms of equality J.I,236. (Page 684)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samavaya: {'def': 'annihilation, termination (?) see samaya (cpd.) & saṭha. (Page 684)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samavaṭṭhita: {'def': 'ready Sn.345 (°-ā savanāya sotā). (Page 684)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samavekkhati: {'def': '(saŋ + ava + ikkh + a), 考虑，调查。【过】 ~kkhi。(p323)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+avekkhati] to consider, examine M.I,225; A.II,32; It.30. (Page 684)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+ava下+ikkh见+a), 考虑，调查。【过】samavekkhi。samavekkhita,【过分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samavekkhitar: {'def': '[fr. last] one who considers It.120. (Page 684)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samavepākin: {'def': '(adj.) [sama+vepākin, cp. vepakka] promoting a good digestion D.II,177; III,166; M.II,67; A.III,65 sq., 103, 153; V,15. (Page 684)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samavepākinī: {'def': '【阴】促进良好的消化。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】促进良好的消化。(p323)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samavhaya: {'def': '[saṁ+ahvaya] a name Dāvs.V,67. (Page 684)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samavossajjati: {'def': '[read saṁvossajjati!] to transfer, entrust D.II,231. (Page 684)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samavāpaka: {'def': '(nt.) [sama+vāpaka, cp. vapati¹] a storeroom M.I,451. (Page 684)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samavāya: {'def': '【阳】组合，集合。(p323)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(m.) coming together, combination S.IV,68; Miln.376; DhsA.57, 196; PvA.104; VvA.20, 55. samavāyena in common VvA.336; khaṇa-s° a momentary meeting J.I,381. (Page 684)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】组合，集合。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samaya: {'def': '[cp. Sk. samaya, fr. saṁ+i. See also samiti] congregation; time, condition, etc. -- At DhsA.57 sq. we find a detailed explⁿ of the word samaya (s-sadda), with meanings given as follows: (1) samavāya (“harmony in antecedents” trslⁿ), (2) khaṇa (opportunity), (3) kāla (season), (4) samūha (crowd, assembly), (5) hetu (condition), (6) diṭṭhi (opinion). (7) paṭilābha (acquisition), (8) pahāna (elimination), (9) paṭivedha (penetra‹-› tion). Bdhgh illustrates each one with fitting examples; cp. DhsA.61. -- We may group as follows: 1. coming together, gathering; a crowd, multitude D.I,178 (°pavādaka debating hall); II,254 sq.; Miln.257; J.I,373; PvA.86 (=samāgama). samayā in a crowd Pv III,3⁴ (so read for samayyā; PvA.189 “saṅgamma”). ‹-› 2. consorting with, intercourse Miln.163; DhA.I,90; sabba° consorting with everybody J.IV,317. -- 3. time, point of time, season D.I,1; Sn.291, 1015; Vin.I,15; VbhA.157 (maraṇa°); Vism.473 (def.); -- samayā samayaṁ upādāya from time to time It.75. Cases adverbially: ekaṁ samayaṁ at one time D.I,47, 87, 111; tena samayena at that time D.I,179; DhA.I,90. aparena s. in course of time, later PvA.31, 68; yasmiṁ samaye at which time D.I,199; DhsA.61. ekasmiṁ samaye some time, once J.I,306. paccūsa° at daybreak PvA.38; aḍḍharatti° at midnight PvA.155; cp. ratta°. -- 4. proper time, due season, opportunity, occasion Sn.388; Vin.IV,77; Bu II.181; Mhvs 22, 59; VbhA.283 sq.; aññatra samayā except at due season Vin.III,212; IV,77; samaye at the right time J.I,27. -- asamaya inopportune, unseasonable D.III,263, 287. -- 5. coincidence, circumstance M.I,438. akkhara° spelling DhA.I,181. -- 6. condition, state; extent, sphere (cp. defⁿ of Bdhgh, above 9); taken dogmatically as “diṭṭhi,” doctrine, view (equal to above defⁿ 6) It.14 (imamhi samaye); DhA.I,90 (jānana°); Dāvs VI,4 (°antara var. views). bāhira° state of an outsider, doctrine of outsiders, i. e. brahmanic DhA.III,392, cp. brāhmaṇānaṁ samaye DA.I,291; ariyānaṁ samaye Miln.229. -- 7. end, conclusion, annihilation Sn.876; °vimutta finally emancipated A.III,173; V,336 (a°); Pug.11; cp. DhsA.57. -- pp. abhi°.

--vasaṭha at A.II,41 is to be read as samavasaṭṭha, i. e. thoroughly given up. Thus Kern, Toev. The same passage occurs at D.III,269 as samavaya-saṭhesana (see under saṭha). (Page 683)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】时间，集会，季节，场合，宗教。samayantara,【中】不同的宗教。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】时间，集会，季节，场合，宗教。 ~ntara, 【中】不同的宗教。(p323)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samañcara: {'def': '[sama¹+cara] pacified, calm S.I,236. (Page 682)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samañcati: {'def': '[sam+añc] to bend together Vin.IV,171, 363. (Page 682)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samañcinteti: {'def': 'to think S.I,124; see sañcinteti. (Page 682)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samaññā: {'def': '(f.) [saṁ+aññā] designation, name D.I,202; II,20; M.III,68; S.II,191; Sn.611, 648; J.II,65; Dhs.§ 1306; loka° a common appellation, a popular expression D.I,202. (Page 682)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】指示。samaññāta,【形】指定。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】指示。 ~ñāta, 【形】指定。(p321)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samaññāta: {'def': '[saṁ+aññāta] designated, known, notorious S.I,65; Sn.118, 820; Nd¹ 153; Vin.II,203. (Page 682)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samaṅgin: {'def': '(adj.) [saṁ+aṅgin] endowed with, possessing Pug.13, 14; J.I,303; Miln.342; VbhA.438. -- saman- gibhūta, possessed of, provided with D.I,36; A.II,125; Sn.321; Vin.I,15; DA.I,121; samaṅgi-karoti to provide with J.VI,266, 289, 290 (cp. VI,323: akarī samaṅgiṁ). (Page 681)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samaṅgitā: {'def': '【阴】具有的事实。(p321)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】具有的事实。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. foll.] the fact of being endowed or connected with (--°) J.III,95 (paraloka°); VbhA.438 (fivefold: āyūhana° etc.). (Page 681)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samaṅgī: {'def': 'samaṅgībhūta,【形】具有的，持有的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'samaṅgībhūta, 【形】具有的，持有的。(p321)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samaṇa: {'def': '(梵wramaṇa‹ wram疲倦),【阳】沙门，隐遁者。samaṇakuttika,【阳】假沙门。samaṇī,【阴】沙门尼。samaṇuddesa,【阳】沙弥。samaṇadhamma,【阳】沙门法(出家人的责任，指修习道法)。samaṇāruppa,【形】适宜沙门的。《马邑经》(T1.725c & 726c)︰「云何沙门？谓息止诸恶不善之法、诸漏秽污，为当来有本，烦热苦报，生、老、病、死因，是谓沙门。云何梵志？谓远离诸恶不善之法，诸漏秽污，为当来有本，烦热苦报，生、老、病、死因，是谓梵志。云何为圣？谓远离诸恶不善之法、诸漏秽污，为当来有本，烦热苦报，生、老、病、死因，是谓为圣。云何净浴？谓净浴诸恶不善之法、诸漏秽污，为当来有本，烦热苦报，生、老、病、死因，是谓净浴，是谓沙门，是谓梵志，是谓为圣，是谓净浴。」', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】沙门，隐遁者。 ~kuttika, 【阳】假沙门。 ~ṇī, 【阴】沙门尼。 ~ṇuddesa, 【阳】沙弥。 ~dhamma, 【阳】沙门法（出家人的责任）。 ~sāruppa, 【形】适宜沙门的。(p322)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[BSk. śramaṇa, fr. śram, but mixed in meaning with śam] a wanderer, recluse, religieux A.I,67; D.III,16, 95 sq., 130 sq.; S.I,45; Dh.184; of a non-Buddhist (tāpasa) J.III,390; an edifying etymology of the word DhA.III,84: “samita-pāpattā s.,” cp. Dh.265 “samitattā pāpānaṁ “samaṇo” ti pavuccati”; four grades mentioned D.II,151; M.I,63; compare Sn.84 sq.; the state of a Samaṇa is attended by eight sukhas J.I,7; the Buddha is often mentioned and addressed by nonBuddhists as Samaṇa: thus D.I,4, 87; Sn.p. 91, 99; Vin.I,8 350; Samaṇas often opposed to Brāhmaṇas: thus, D.I,13; It.58, 60; Sn, p. 90; Vin.I,12; II,110; samaṇabrāhmaṇā, Samaṇas and Brāhmaṇas quite generally: “leaders in religious life” (cp. Dial. II.165) D.I,5; II,150; A.I,110,--173 sq.; It.64; Sn.189; Vin.II,295; samaṇadhammaṁ the duties of a samaṇa A.III,371; J.I,106, 107, 138; pure-samaṇa a junior who walks before a Bhikkhu Vin.II,32; pacchāsamaṇa one who walks behind Vin.I,186; II,32; A.III,137. -- samaṇī a female recluse S.I,133; ThA.18; J.V,424, 427; Vin.IV,235. -- assamaṇa not a true samaṇa Vin.I,96.

--uddesa a novice, a sāmaṇera D.I,151; M.III,128; S.V,161; Vin.IV,139; A.II,78; III,343. Cp. BSk. śramaṇoddeśa Divy 160. --kuttaka (m.) who wears the dress of a Samaṇa Vin.III,68 sq. (=samaṇa-vesa-dhārako, Bdhgh ib. p. 271). (Page 682)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '沙门', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Samaṇaka: {'def': '【阳】假沙门。hīnam attha vannaṁ ajjhupagatā, yadidaṁ muṇḍake samaṇake ibbhe kaṇhe bandhupādāpacce.(秃头之假沙门，既卑贱又邪恶，乃是从大梵天之足所生之子孙。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[samaṇa+ka] a contemptible (little) ascetic, “some sort of samaṇa” D.I,90; M.II,47, 210; Sn.p. 21; Miln.222; DA.I,254. At A.II,48 samaṇaka is a slip for sasanaka. Cp. muṇḍaka in form & meaning. (Page 682)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samaṇḍalīkata: {'def': '[sa+maṇḍala+kata] hemmed Vin.I,255 (kaṭhina). (Page 682)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sambaddha: {'def': '(sambandhati 的【过分】)。(p330)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(sambandhati 的【过分】)已连接。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+baddha] bound together Sdhp.81. (Page 693)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sambahula: {'def': '(adj.) [saṁ+bahula] many Vin.I,32; D.I,2; J.I,126, 329; Sn.19; sambahulaṁ karoti to take a plurality vote J.II,45. (Page 693)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】许多的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】许多的。(p330)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sambahulatā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. sambahula] a plurality vote J.II,45. (Page 693)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sambahulika: {'def': '(adj.) in °ṁ karoti=sambahulaṁ karoti J.II,197. (Page 693)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sambala: {'def': '【中】供给。(p330)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】供给。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. *Sk. śambala] provision S.II,98; J.V,71, 240; VI,531. (Page 693)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sambandha: {'def': '【阳】连接。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】连接。(p330)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+bandha] connection, tie D.II,296=M.I,58; SnA 108, 166, 249, 273, 343, 516. °-kula related family J.III,362; a-sambandha (adj.) incompatible (C. on asaññuta J.III,266). (Page 693)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sambandhana: {'def': '(nt.) [saṁ+bandhana] binding together, connection J.I,328. (Page 693)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】绑在一起，连接。(p330)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】绑在一起，连接。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sambandhati: {'def': '(saṁ一起+bandh绑+a), 绑，联合。【过】sambandhi。【独】sambandhitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+bandhati] to bind together, to unite Vin.II,116; pass. sambajjhati is united, attached to J.III,7; ger. sambandhitvā Vin.I,274; II,116. -- pp. sambaddha. (Page 693)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saŋ + bandh + a), 绑，联合。【过】 ~ndhi。【独】 ~ndhitvā。(p330)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sambarimāyā: {'def': '(f.) [sambarī+māyā] the art of Sambari, jugglery S.I,239 (trslⁿ “Sambara’s magic art”). Sambara is a king of the Asuras. (Page 693)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sambhagga: {'def': '[saṁ+bhagga] broken S.I,123; M.I,237. Cp. sampali°. (Page 694)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(sambhañjati的【过分】) 打破，分裂。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sambhajanā: {'def': '(f.) [saṁ+bhajanā] consorting with Dhs.1326; Pug.20. (Page 694)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sambhajati: {'def': '(saṁ+bhaj), 亲近。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+bhajati] to consort with, love, to be attached, devoted J.III,495; ppr. sambhajanto J.III,108; Pot. sambhajeyya ibid. (C. samāgaccheyya). -- pp. sambhatta. (Page 694)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sambhama: {'def': '【阳】刺激，混乱。(p331)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】刺激，混乱。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+bhama, fr. bhram] confusion, excitement; °-patta overwhelmed with excitement J.IV,433. (Page 694)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sambhamati: {'def': '(saŋ + bham + a), 考虑，旋转。【过】 ~bhami。【独】 ~mitvā。(p331)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+bham+a), 考虑，旋转。【过】sambhami。【独】sambhamitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+bhamati] to revolve DhsA.307. (Page 694)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sambhata: {'def': '[saṁ+bhata] brought together, stored up; (nt.) store, provisions M.I,116; D.III,190; A.III,38=IV.266; S.I,35; II,185=It.17; J.I,338; ThA.11. (Page 694)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【过分】已集合，已储存；资产。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【过分】已集合，已储存。(p331)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sambhati: {'def': '(Dhtp 214 in meaning “vissāsa” 信赖), 已安静(to subside, to be calmed)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': ' [śrambh, given as sambh at Dhtp 214 in meaning “vissāsa”] to subside, to be calmed; only in prep. combⁿ paṭippassambhati (q. v.). (Page 694)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sambhatta: {'def': '【阳】朋友，忠实的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of sambhajati] devoted, a friend J.I,106, 221; Nd¹ 226=Vism.25. -- yathāsambhattaṁ according to where each one’s companions live D.II,98; S.V,152. (Page 694)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】朋友，忠实的人。(p331)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sambhatti: {'def': '(f.) [saṁ+bhatti] joining, consorting with Dhs.1326; Pug.20. (Page 694)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sambhava: {'def': '【阳】起源，出生，制造，交会，男性的精液。yathāsambhavaṁ﹐根据情况。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】起源，出生，制造，男性的精液。(p331)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+bhava] 1. origin, birth, production D.II,107; S.III,86; A.II,10, 18; Sn.724, 741 etc.; Dh.161; J.I,168; mātāpettikas° born from father and mother D.I,34; DhsA.306; natthi sambhavaṁ has not arisen Sn.235. -- 2. semen virile J.V,152; VI,160; Miln.124.

--esin seeking birth M.I,48; S.II,11; Sn.147. (Page 694)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sambhavana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. sambhavati] coming into existence Nett 28. (Page 694)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】形成。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】形成。(p331)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sambhavati: {'def': 'sambhuṇāti & sambhoti [saṁ+bhavati] 1. to be produced, to arise D.I,45, 76; S.I,135; IV,67; Sn.734; Dāvs.V,6; Miln.210. -- 2. to be adequate, competent D.II,287; na s. is of no use or avail Miln.152. -- 3. to be present, to witness J.I,56. -- 4. to be together with J.II,205 (C. on sambhaj-°). -- Pres. °-bhuṇati or °-bhuṇāti (like abhi-sam-bhuṇāti) in the sense of “to reach” or “to be able to,” capable of Vin.I,256 (°-bhuṇāti); Sn.396 (part. a-sambhuṇanto=asakkonto, C.); also sambhoti Sn.734, D.II,287; fut. sambhossāma Mhvs 5, 100. -- aor. sambhavi D.I,96; 3^rd pl. samabhavuṁ Dāvs.V,6; ger. sambhuyya having come together with VvA.232. -- pp. sambhūta. -- Caus. sambhāveti (q. v.). (Page 694)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'Sambhuṇāti, & Sambhoti (saṁ+bhū+a), 1.生产，生起(to be produced, to arise)。2.能胜任的，能干的，称职的(to be adequate, competent)。3.呈现，存在(to be present, to witness)。4.与…在一起(to be together with)。【过】sambhavi。【过分】sambhūta。asambhuṇanto= asakkonto(不生起)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + bhū + a), 出现，被生产，呈现，存在，与…在一起。【过】 ~bhavi。【过分】 ~bhūta。(p331)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sambhavesin: {'def': '求生者[PS:sambhava(saṁ-bhū)发生;生起;生成; sambhava rūpa 生成色]', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Sambhavesī: {'def': '【阳】正在寻求出生者，求生者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】正在寻求出生者。(p331)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sambhañjati: {'def': '(saṁ+bhañj+a), 打破，分裂。【过】sambhañji。【独】sambhañjitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+bhañjati] to split, break J.V,32; Caus. sambhañjeti to break M.I,237; S.I,123; pass. aor. samabhajjisaṁ J.V,70. -- pp. sambhagga. -- Cp. sampali°. (Page 694)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saŋ + bhañj + a), 打破，分裂。【过】 ~ñji。【独】 ~ñjitvā。(p331)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sambheda: {'def': '[saṁ+bheda] mixing up, confusion, contamination D.III,72; A.I,51=It.36; DA.I,260 (jāti° mixing of caste); Vism.123 (of colours). (Page 694)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】混淆，混乱。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】混淆，混乱。(p331)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sambhejja: {'def': '[grd. of sambhindati] belonging to the confluence of rivers (said of the water of the ocean), united S.II,135; V,461 (various reading sambhojja). (Page 694)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sambhindati: {'def': '(saṁ+bhid打破+ṁ-a), 1.混合。2.打破。【过分】sambhinna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + bhid + ŋ-a), 1. 混合。 2. 打破。【过分】 sambhinna。(p331)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+bhindati] to mix Vin.I,111 (sīmāya sīmaṁ s. to mix a new boundary with an old one, i. e. to run on a boundary unduly); DA.I,134 (udakena). ‹-› pp. sambhinna. -- Cp. sambhejja. (Page 694)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sambhinna: {'def': '[pp. of sambhindati] 1. mixed, mixed up Vin.I,210; II,67, 68 (cp. Vin. Texts II.431); J.I,55; Sn.9, 319 (°mariyāda-bhāva confusing the dividing lines, indistinctness), 325 (id.). Said of a woman (i. e. of indistinct sexuality) Vin.II,271=III,129. -- 2. broken up (?), exhausted J.I,503 (°sarīra). -- asambhinna: 1. unmixed, unadulterated Vism.41 (°khīra-pāyāsa); J.V,257 (°khattiyavaṁsa); DhA.II,85 (id.). -- 2. (of the voice) unmixed, i. e. distinct, clear Miln.360. -- 3. name of a kind of ointment Vin.IV,117. (Page 694)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sambhoga: {'def': '[saṁ+bhoga] eating, living together with Vin.I,97; II,21; IV,137; A.I,92; SnA 71; J.IV,127; Sdhp.435. (Page 694)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】在一起吃，在一起住。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】在一起吃，在一起住。(p331)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sambhoti: {'def': '(saṁ+bhū+a), 出现，存在，与…在一起。参考 Sambhavati。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'see sambhavati. (Page 695)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '参考 Sambhavati。(p331)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sambhuñjati: {'def': '[saṁ+bhuñjati] 1. to eat together with Vin.IV,137. -- 2. to associate with S.I,162. (Page 694)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+bhuj吃+ṁ-a), 一起吃。【过】sambhuñji。【独】sambhuñjitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + bhuj + ŋ-a), 一起吃。【过】 ~ñji。【独】 ~jitvā。(p331)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sambhuṇāti: {'def': 'see sambhavati. (Page 694)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sambhāra: {'def': '【阳】材料，必要的成分，积聚，堆。(p331)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. saṁ+bhṛ] “what is carried together,” viz. 1. accumulation, product, preparation; sambhāraseda bringing on sweating by artificial means Vin.I,205. -- 2. materials, requisite ingredients (of food) Miln.258; J.I,481; V,13, 506; J.I,9; II,18; IV,492; dabba° an effective requisite DhA.I,321; II,114; bodhis° the necessary conditions for obtaining enlightening J.I,1; vimokkhas° ThA.214. -- 3. constituent part, element S.IV,197; DhsA.306.-4. bringing together, collocation S.I,135; Miln.28. (Page 694)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】材料，必要的成分，积聚，堆。aṅgasambhārā, 材料成份。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sambhāsā: {'def': '(f.) [saṁ+bhāsā] conversation, talk; sukha-° J.VI,296 (v. l.); mudu-° J.II,326=IV.471=V.451. (Page 694)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sambhāvana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. sambhāveti] supposition, assumption, the meaning of the particle sace Vin.I,372¹⁹; cp. J.II,29; DhA.II,77. (Page 694)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sambhāvanā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. sambhāveti] honour, reverence, intention, confidence Mhvs 29, 55; DhsA.163 (=okappanā); Sdhp.224. (Page 694)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】敬意，敬重，尊敬。 ~vanīya, 【形】值得尊敬的。(p331)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】敬意，敬重，尊敬。sambhāvanīya,【形】值得尊敬的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sambhāveti: {'def': '[Caus. of sambhavati. The Dhtp (512) gives a special root sambhu in meaning “pāpuṇana”] 1. to undertake, achieve, to be intent on (Acc.) Vin.I,253; DhsA.163. -- 2. to reach, catch up to (Acc.) Vin.I,277; II,300. -- 3. to produce, effect Miln.49. -- 4. to consider J.III,220. -- 5. to honour, esteem; grd. °bhāvanīya to be honoured or respected, honourable VvA.152; MA 156. -- pp. sambhāvita. (Page 694)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saŋ + bhū + e), 尊敬，致敬，和…混合。【过】 ~esi。【过分】~vita。【独】 ~vetvā。(p331)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+bhū+e), 尊敬，致敬，和…混合。【过】sambhāvesi。【过分】sambhāvita。【独】sambhāvetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sambhāvita: {'def': '[pp. of sambhāveti] honoured, esteemed M.I,110, 145; ThA.200; J.III,269 (=bhaddaka); VbhA.109. (Page 694)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sambhīta: {'def': '【过分】已惊吓。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [saṁ+bhīta] terrified Miln.339; a-sambhīta, fearless Miln.105; J.IV,92; V,34; VI,302. (Page 694)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【过分】已惊吓。(p331)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sambhūta: {'def': '(sambhavati 的【过分】), 已从…生起，发生。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of sambhavati] arisen from, produced Sn.272 (atta° self-; cp. SnA 304; attabhāva-pariyāye attani s.); S.I,134. (Page 694)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(sambhavati 的【过分】), 已从…兴起。(p331)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sambhūta-Sāṇavāsin: {'def': 'm. 第二結集比丘の名. = Sāṇavāsin-Sambhūta', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Sambodha: {'def': '(saṁ+bodha觉)(pp. of [sambujjhati完全觉])﹐等觉(enlightenment, highest wisdom, awakening)。sambuddha： I. pp. 完全觉{well understood}II. m. 已完全觉者(古译：正觉.等觉){one who has thoroughly understood，being [enlightened给予知识、启发、启蒙、教化、开导、照耀、使发光辉]，a Buddha}%bsameti： I. 集合{to come together，to meet，to assemble}', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+bodha] enlightenment, highest wisdom, awakening; the insight belonging to the three higher stages of the Path, Vin.I,10; D.III,130 sq., 136 sq.; S.II,223; V,214; M.I,16, 241; A.I,258; II,200, 240 sq., 325 sq.; V,238 sq.; It.27; pubbe sambodhā, before attaining insight M.I,17, 163; II,211; III,157; S.II,5, 10; IV,6, 8, 97, 233; V,281; A.I,258; III,82, 240. abhabba sambodhāya, incapable of insight M.I,200, 241=A II 200. (Cp. Dial. I.190--192.) --gāmin leading to enlightenment D.III,264; Sn.p. 140. --pakkhika belonging to enlightenment A.IV,357. --sukha the bliss of enlightenment A.IV,341 sq. (Page 693)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sambodhana: {'def': '(saṁ+bodhana),【中】1.唤醒。2.呼格〔巴利语法〕(the vocative case)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】 1. 唤醒。 2. 呼格〔巴利语法〕。(p330)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [saṁ+bodhana] the vocative case VvA.12, 18. (Page 694)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sambodheti: {'def': '(saṁ+budh醒+e), 教，使理解。【过】sambodhesi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'see sambujjhati. (Page 694)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saŋ + budh + e), 教，使理解。【过】 ~esi。(p330)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sambodhi: {'def': '【阴】觉悟，三菩提（最高的智能）。(p330)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】觉悟，三菩提(正觉，最高的智慧)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [saṁ+bodhi¹] the same as sambodha, the highest enlightenment D.I,156; II,155; Dh.89=S.V,29; Sn.478; S.I,68, 181; A.II,14; It.28, 42, 117; SnA 73. See also sammā°.

--agga [°yagga] the summit of enlightenment Sn.693; --gāmin leading to enlightenment S.V,234; --patta having attained enlightenment, an Arahant Sn.503, 696; --parāyana that which has enlightenment as its aim, proceeding towards enlightenment, frequently of the Sotāpanna D.I,156 (discussed in Dialogues I.190 sq.); III,131 sq.; A.I,232; II,80, 238; III,211; IV,12, 405; S.V,343, 346; DA.I,313. --sukha the bliss of enlightenment Kvu 209. (Page 694)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sambodhiyaṅga: {'def': 'the same as sambojjhaṅga A.V,253 sq.; S.V,24; cp. spelling sambodhi-aṅga at Dh.89; DhA.II,162. (Page 694)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sambojjhaṅga: {'def': '觉支，智慧的要素。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}; {'def': '[saṁ+bojjhaṅga] constituent of Sambodhi (enlightenment), of which there are seven: sati, selfpossession; dhammavicaya, investigation of doctrine; viriya, energy; pīti, joy; passaddhi, tranquillity; samādhi, concentration; upekhā, equanimity D.II,79, 303 sq.; III,106, 226; M.I,61 sq.; A.IV,23; S.V,110 sq.; Nd² s. v. Miln.340; VbhA.135, 310. The characteristics of the several constitutents together with var. means of cultivation are given at Vism.132 sq.=VbhA.275 sq. (Page 693)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(梵saptabodhyaṅga),【阳】觉支(觉悟的成分)，完全觉支，菩提分。D.33./III,251-2.︰Satta bojjhaṅgā-- satisambojjhaṅgo, dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgo vīriyasambojjhaṅgo, pītisambojjhaṅgo, passaddhisambojjhaṅgo, samādhisambojjhaṅgo, upekkhāsambojjhaṅgo.(七觉支︰(1)念(sati, smrti f.)觉支、(2)择法(dhamma-vicaya, dharma-pravicaya m.)觉支、(3)精进(vīriya, vīrya n.)觉支(英雄本色觉支)、(4)喜(pīti, prīti f.)觉支、(5)轻安(passaddhi, prawrabdhi f.)觉支、(6)定(samādhi, samādhi m.)觉支、(7)舍(upekkhā, upeksā f.)觉支(旁观觉支)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】觉支。(p330)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sambuddha: {'def': '【阳】全知者(佛陀)，三菩陀。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】全知者（佛陀），〔三藐〕三菩陀。(p330)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+buddha] 1. well understood Sn.765 (various reading, sambuddhuṁ=to know); J.V,77 (sam° & a°, taken by C. as ppr. “jānanto” & “ajānanto”); susambuddha easily understood Sn.764. -- 2. one who has thoroughly understood, being enlightened, a Buddha Sn.178 etc., 559; A.II,4; Dh.181; S.I,4; It.35 etc. (Page 693)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sambuddhi: {'def': '(f.) [saṁ+buddhi] complete understanding; adj. °vant wise J.III,361 (=buddhisampanna). (Page 693)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sambujjhati: {'def': '(saŋ + budh + ya), 明白，通晓。【过】 ~jjhi。【过分】 ~buddha。【独】 ~jhitvā。(p330)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+bujjhati] to understand, achieve, know DhsA.218; inf. sambuddhuṁ Sn.765 (v. l. sambuddhaṁ); Caus. sambodheti to teach, instruct J.I,142. Cp. sammā°. (Page 693)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+budh醒+ya), 明白，通晓。【过】sambujjhi。【过分】sambuddha。【独】sambujjhitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sambuka: {'def': '[cp. Sk. śambuka] a shell D.I,84=A.I,9; III,395 (sippi°); J.II,100. (Page 693)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】牡蛎，蚝，贝壳。(p330)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】牡蛎(台语：蚵仔)，蚝，贝壳。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sambādha: {'def': '2(梵sambādha),【阳】阴部，密处。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. sambādha] 1. crowding, pressure, inconvenience from crowding, obstruction Vism.119. janasambādharahita free from crowding Miln.409; kiṭṭhasambādha crowding of corn, the time when the corn is growing thick M.I,115; J.I,143, 388. -- yassa sambādho bhavissati he who finds it too crowded Vin.IV,43; asambādha unobstructed Sn.150; atisambādhatā (q. v.) the state of being too narrow J.I,7; puttadārasambādhasayana a bed encumbered with child and wife Miln.243; cp. S.I,78; (in fig. sense) difficulty, trouble S.I,7, 48; J.IV,488; sambādhapaṭipanna of the eclipsed moon S.I,50. As adjective “crowded, dense” sambādho gharavāso life in the family is confined, i. e. a narrow life, full of hindrances D.I,63, 250; S.II,219; V,350; DA.I,180; s. magga a crowded path J.I,104; nijana° vana Vism.342; s. vyūha S.V,369. -- atisambādha too confined DhA.I,310 (cakkavāḷa). -- compar. sambādhatara S.V,350; asambādhaṁ comfortably J.I,80. ‹-› 2. pudendum masculinum Vin.I,216; II,134; pudendum muliebre Vin.IV,259; Sn.609; sambādhaṭṭhāna (nt.) pudendum muliebre J.I,61; IV,260. (Page 693)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1(梵sambādha),【阳】1. 龌龊(台语：ak cak8)，迫迮(ㄗㄜˊ)，局促，愦乱(crowding, pressure, inconvenience from crowding, obstruction)。A.9.42./IV,449.︰“Pañcime, āvuso, kāmaguṇā sambādho vutto Bhagavatā.(友！五欲为世尊所说之龌龊。) (五欲乃至非想非非想处，皆为世尊所说之龌龊。具足想受灭住(灭尽定)，以慧观而诸漏尽，才无龌龊。参考A.9.42./IV,449-450.) AA.9.42./IV,206.Sambādhasuttavaṇṇanā︰sambādhoti ayaṁ vitakkavicārānaṁ aniruddhabhāvo sambādho saṁpīḷā nāma.(龌龊：不能停止(aniruddha(‹a-ni-rudh成长)此诸寻伺之紧迫的痛苦。)。 KhA.248.Mettasuttavaṇṇanā︰Asambādhanti sambādhavirahitaṁ, bhinnasīmanti vuttaṁ hoti. Sīmā nāma paccatthiko vuccati, tasmimpi pavattanti attho.(没有障碍(a-sambādhaṁ)︰空无障碍，这是打破界限之说。在它转起(生起)界限(sīmā)(即心量有限)，即称为敌对之意。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】紧迫，拥挤，不便。 ~dhana, 【中】障碍。(p330)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sambādhana: {'def': '【中】龌龊，愦闹，愦乱。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sambādheti: {'def': '(saṁ+bādh骚扰+e), 拥挤，阻隔。【过】sambādhesi。【独】sambādhetvā。SA.2.7./I,106.：sambādheti nīvaraṇasambādhaṁ kāmaguṇasambādhanti dve sambādhā.(两种龌龊︰五盖龌龊、五欲龌龊。) 龌龊也有身龌龊及心龌龊。身龌龊，过出离的生活就解决；至於心龌龊，经中说，五欲乃至非想非非想处，皆为龌龊。具足想受灭住(灭尽定)，以慧观而诸漏尽，才无龌龊。(cf. A.9.42./IV,449.)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+bādheti] to be crowded D.II,269 (read °bādhāyanti). (Page 693)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saŋ + bādh + e), 拥挤，阻隔。【过】 ~esi。【独】 ~dhetvā。(p330)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sambāhana: {'def': '【中】摩擦，按摩。(p330)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. last] rubbing, shampooing D.I,7 (as a kind of exercise for wrestlers DA.I,88); A.I,62; IV,54; Miln.241; J.I,286. (Page 693)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】摩擦，按摩。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sambāhati: {'def': '(saṁ+bāh压+a),按摩，擦，洗头(to rub, shampoo)。【使】sambāheti, sambāhāpeti。【过】sambāhi。【独】sambāhitvā。sambāhanta【现分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + bāh + a), 按摩，擦，洗头。【过】 ~bāhi。【独】 ~hitvā(p330)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+bāhati; Kern, Toev. s. v. disputes relation to vah, but connects it with bāh “press”] 1. to rub, shampoo J.I,293; II,16; IV,431; V,126; also sambāheti Miln.241; Caus. sambāhāpeti to cause to shampoo Vin.IV,342; ppr. sambāhanta J.VI,77; aor. sambāhi J.I,293 Cp. pari°. (Page 693)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samekkhana: {'def': '【中】看著。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】看着。(p327)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samekkhati: {'def': '(saṁ+ikkh见+a), 找寻，考虑。【过】samekkhi。【过分】samekkhita。【独】samekkhitvā, amekkhiya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + ikkh + a), 找寻，考虑。【过】 ~kkhi。【过分】 ~khita。【独】 ~khitvā, ~khiya。(p327)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+ikkhati] to consider, to seek, look for; Pot. samekkhe J.IV,5; ppr. samekkhamāna Th.1, 547; & samekkhaṁ J.II,65; ger. samekkhiya Mhvs 37, 237. (Page 689)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samerita: {'def': '【过分】已移动，已开始运动。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+erita] moved, set in motion; filled with (-°), pervaded by Sn.937; Nd¹ 410; J.VI,529; Vism.172. (Page 689)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【过分】已移动，已开始运动。(p327)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sameta: {'def': '(Sameti的【过分】), 已具有，已连接，已结合。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of sameti] associating with Miln.396; connected with, provided with Mhvs 19, 69; combined, constituted Sn.873, 874. (Page 689)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sameti: {'def': '(saŋ + i + a), 集合，遇见，同意，比较，使相等，平息。【过】samesi。【独】 sametvā。(p327)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+eti] 1. to come together, to meet, to assemble Bu II.199=J.I,29. -- 2. to associate with, to go to D.II,273; J.IV,93. -- 3. to correspond to, to agree D.I,162, 247; J.I,358; III,278. -- 4. to know, consider S.I,186; Nd¹ 284. -- 5. to fit in J.VI,334. -- imper. sametu J.IV,93²⁰; fut. samessati S.IV,379; It.70; aor. samiṁsu Bu II.199; S.II,158=It.70; & samesuṁ J.II,30¹⁶; ger. samecca (1) (coming) together with D.II,273; J.VI,211, 318. -- (2) having acquired or learnt, knowing S.I,186; Sn.361, 793; A.II,6. -- pp. samita & sameta [=saṁ+ā+ita]. (Page 689)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+i +a), 1.集合，遇见(to come together, to meet, to assemble)。2.同意，会同(to associate with, to go to)。3.比较，使相等(to correspond to, to agree)。4.知道(to know, consider)。5.适合(to fit in)。【过】samesi, samiṁsu, samesuṁ。【未】samessati。【独】sametvā，samecca((coming) together with)。【命】sametu。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sametikā: {'def': 'SII.285; read samāhitā. (Page 689)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samiddha: {'def': '(samijjhati 的【过分】), 已成功，已富有。(p325)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of samijjhati] 1. succeeded, successful Vin.I,37; Bu II.4=J.I,3; Miln.331. -- 2. rich, magnificent J.VI,393; J.III,14; samiddhena (adv.) successfully J.VI,314. (Page 686)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(samijjhati 的【过分】), 已成功，已富有。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samiddhi: {'def': '(f.) [fr. samijjhati] success, prosperity Dh.84; S.I,200. (Page 686)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】成功，繁荣。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】成功，繁荣。(p325)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samiddhika: {'def': '(adj.) [samiddhi+ka] rich in, abounding in Sdhp.421. (Page 686)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samiddhin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. samiddhi] richly endowed with ThA.18 (Ap.V,23); fem. --inī J.V,90. (Page 686)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samidhā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. saṁ+idh; see indhana] fuel, firewood SnA 174. (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samihita: {'def': '[=saṁhita] collected, composed Vin.I,245= D.I,104=238; A.III,224=229=DA.I,273; D.I,241, 272. (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samijjhana: {'def': '【中】成功。(p325)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】成功。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. samijjhati] fulfilment, success DhA.I,112. (Page 686)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samijjhati: {'def': '(saṁ+idh +ya), 成功，兴隆，奏效。【过】samijjhi。【过分】samiddha。【独】samijjhitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + idh + ya), 成功，兴隆，奏效。【过】 ~jjhi。【过分】samiddha。【独】 ~jjhitvā。(p325)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+ijjhati] to succeed, prosper, take effect D.I,71; Sn.766 (cp. Nd¹ 2=labhati etc.); Bu II.59= J.I,14, 267; Pot. samijjheyyuṁ D.I,71; aor. samijjhi J.I,68; Fut. samijjhissati J.I,15. -- pp. samiddha. ‹-› Caus. II. °ijjhāpeti to endow or invest with (Acc.) J.VI,484. (Page 686)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samijjhiṭṭha: {'def': '[saṁ+ajjhiṭṭha] ordered, requested J.VI,12 (=āṇatta C.). (Page 686)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samita: {'def': '1(saṁ+ita, sameti的【过分】) 集合(gathered, assembled)。【中】【副】samitaṁ﹐连续不断地、接连地(continuously)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '⁴ [pp. of saṁ+śam to labour] arranged, put in order J.V,201 (=saṁvidahita C.). (Page 686)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [sa+mita, of mā] equal (in measure), like S.I,6. (Page 686)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '2 (sa+mita, of mā)同样(尺寸)(equal (in measure))，好像(like)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '3 (sammati1的【过分】) 已镇定(quiet)，已平息(appeased)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '4(saṁ+wam(平息)的【过分】劳动)安排(arranged)，清理(put in order =saṁvidahita)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [saṁ+ita, pp. of sameti] gathered, assembled Vv 64¹⁰; VvA.277. -- nt. as adv. samitaṁ continuously M.I,93; A.IV,13; It.116; Miln.70, 116. (Page 686)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(sameti 的【过分】), 已镇定，已平息。 ~tta, 【中】镇定的境界。 ~tāvī,【阳】自己已冷静阿人。(p325)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '³ [pp. of sammati¹] quiet, appeased DhA.III,84. (Page 686)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samitatta: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. samita³] state of being quieted Dh.265. (Page 686)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹samita3)【中】镇定的境界(state of being quieted)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samitaŋ: {'def': '【副】总是，不断地。(p325)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samitaṁ: {'def': '【副】总是，不断地。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samiti: {'def': '【阴】集会，社会。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】集会，社会。(p325)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. saṁ+i] assembly D.II,256; Dh.321; J.IV,351; Pv.II,3¹³ (=sannipāta PvA.86); DhA.IV,13. (Page 686)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samitāvin: {'def': '[samita³+āvin, cp. vijitāvin] one who has quieted himself, calm, Sn.449, 520; S.I,62, 188; A.II,49, 50. Cp. BSk. śamitāvin & samitāvin. (Page 686)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samitāvī: {'def': '【阳】自己已冷静。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samiñjana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. samiñjati] doubling up, bending back (orig. stretching!) Vism.500 (opp. pasāraṇa). See also sammiñjana. (Page 686)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samiñjati: {'def': '[saṁ+iñjati of ṛñj or ṛj to stretch] 1. to double up M.I,326. -- 2. (intrs.) to be moved or shaken Dh.81 (=calati kampati DhA.II,149). See also sammiñjati. (Page 686)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samma: {'def': '¹ [as to etym. Andersen, P. Reader II.263 quite plausibly connects it with Vedic śam (indecl.) “hail,” which is often used in a vocative sense, esp. in combⁿ śam ca yos ca “hail & blessing!”, but also suggests relation to sammā. Other suggestions see Andersen, s. v.] a term of familiar address D.I,49, 225; DA.I,151; Vin.II,161; J.I,59; PvA.204; plur. sammā Vin.II,161. (Page 695)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】铙钹。(p331)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² [samyak] see sammā. (Page 695)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】铙钹(cymbal)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(只在【呼】中，密友之间的称呼) 亲爱的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(只在【呼】中，密友之间的称呼) 亲爱的。(p331)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '³ a cymbal Miln.60; Dhs.621; J.I,3; DhsA.319. ‹-› Otherwise as °tāḷa a kind of cymbal Th.1, 893, 911; Vv 35³; VvA.161; J.VI,60; 277 (-l-). (Page 695)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sammad'eva: {'def': '【无】适当地，彻底地。(p332)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sammada: {'def': '[saṁ+mada] drowsiness after a meal D.II,195; A.I,3; V,83; J.II,63; bhatta-° S.I,7; J.VI,57. (Page 695)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+mada陶醉),【阳】饭后的睡意。饭后，身体活动旺盛(消化食物)，躺下睡觉达不到休息的效果，因此不要养成吃饱就睡的习惯。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】餐后的睡意。(p331)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sammadakkhāta: {'def': '【形】很好地传道。(p331)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】很好地传道。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sammadañña: {'def': 'sammadaññāya, 【独】正确地了解。(p332)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'sammadaññāya,【独】正确地了解。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sammadda: {'def': '【阳】拥挤。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】拥挤。(p332)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sammaddana: {'def': '【中】践踏，压烂。(p332)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】践踏，压烂。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sammaddasa: {'def': '【形】有正见的，正确地看见。(p332)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】有正见的，正确地看见。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sammaddati: {'def': '(saṁ+madd压破+a), 践踏(台语︰thun2 tah8)，压碎。【过】sammaddi。【过分】sammaddita。【独】sammadditvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+maddati] to trample down Vin.I,137; 286 (cīvaraṁ, to soak, steep); ppr. sammaddanto Vin.I,137 (to crush). (Page 695)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saŋ + madd + a), 践踏，压碎。【过】 ~maddi。【过分】 ~dita。【独】 ~ditvā。(p332)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sammadiṭṭhi: {'def': '正见，八支圣道的第一支。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}

Sammad°: {'def': 'see sammā. (Page 695)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sammad’eva: {'def': '【无】适当地，彻底地。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sammaggata: {'def': 'see under sammā°. (Page 695)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】走上正轨者。(p331)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】走上正轨者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sammajjana: {'def': '【中】打扫。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.-nt.) [fr. last] sweeping J.I,67; SnA 66 (°ka); VvA.319 (T. sammajja). (Page 695)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sammajjanī: {'def': '【阴】扫帚。(p331)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】扫帚(broom)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. last] a broom Vin.II,129; A.IV,170; Vism.105; DhA.III,7; cp. sammujjanī. (Page 695)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sammajjati: {'def': '(saŋ + majj + a), 扫除，擦亮。【过】 ~jji。【过分】 ~jjita,sammaṭṭha。【现分】 ~janta。【独】 ~jitvā。【潜】 ~jitabba。(p331)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+majj下沉+a), 扫除，擦亮。【过】sammajji。【过分】sammajjita, sammaṭṭha。【现分】sammajjanta。【独】sammajjitvā。【义】sammajjitabba。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+majjati²] 1. to sweep Vin.I,46; II,209; J.II,25; DhA.I,58; II,184; III,168. -- 2. to rub, polish J.I,338. -- pp. sammaṭṭha. -- Caus. II. sammajjāpeti Vin.I,240. (Page 695)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sammakkhana: {'def': '(nt.) [saṁ+makkhana] smearing Vism.346. (Page 695)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】涂。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】涂。(p331)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sammakkheti: {'def': '(saŋ + makkh + e), 涂，【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~khita。【独】~khetvā。(p331)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+makkh涂+e), 涂，【过】sammakkhesi。【过分】sammakkhita。【独】sammakkhetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+makkheti] to smear Vism.346. (Page 695)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sammakkhita: {'def': '[saṁ+makkhita] smeared J.V,16; abstr. °tta (nt.) Vism.346. (Page 695)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sammannati: {'def': '(saŋ + man + a), 批准，同意，赞成，选择。【过】 ~nni。【过分】 ~nita, sammata。【独】 ~nitvā。(p332)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+man, fr. Vedic manute, manvate, for the usual manyate: see maññati] 1. to assent, to consent to Mhvs 3, 10; DA.I,11. -- 2. to agree to, to authorize, select Vin.III,150, 158, 238; IV,50; Mhvs 3, 9; sīmaṁ s. to determine, to fix the boundary Vin.I,106 sq. -- 3. to esteem, honour; inf. sammannituṁ Vin.IV,50. sammannesi D.I,105 is misprint for samannesi. -- ppr. sammata. (Page 695)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+man想+a), 批准，同意，赞成，选择。【过】sammanni。【过分】sammannita, sammata。【独】sammannitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sammanteti: {'def': '[saṁ+manteti] to consult together D.I,142; J.I,269, 399; DA.I,135. (Page 695)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+mant讨论+e) 共商。【过】sammantesi。【过分】sammantita。【独】sammantetvā。【现分】sammantayamāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + mant + e) 共商。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~tita。【独】~tetvā。(p332)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sammappadhānā: {'def': '【中】正精进。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】正精进。(p332)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sammappaññā: {'def': '【阴】正慧。(p332)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】正慧。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sammasambuddha: {'def': '〔正自觉，〕靠自己完全觉悟的人，佛陀。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}

Sammasana: {'def': '(fr. sammasati), 【中】掌握，熟练(grasping, mastering)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[(nt.) fr. last] grasping, mastering Miln.178; Vism.287, 629 sq.; cp. Cpd. 65, 210. (Page 695)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹sammasati＜sam一起+ mas(梵mrw)接触、感觉),【中】思惟。sammasanañāṇa, 思惟智。sammasanarūpa, 思惟色。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sammasati: {'def': '[saṁ+masati] to touch, seize, grasp, know thoroughly, master S.II,107; Dh.374; Miln.325; to think, meditate on (Acc.) J.VI,379; ppr. sammasaṁ II.107 & sammasanto Miln.379; J.I,74, 75; fem. sammasantī ThA.62; sammasamāna Miln.219, 325, 398; pp. sammasita. (Page 695)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saŋ + ma + a), 抓住，接触，彻底地知道，修禅。【过】 ~masi。【过分】 ~masita。【独】 ~sitvā。(p332)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+ma+a), 接触，彻底地知道，思惟(to touch, seize, grasp, know thoroughly, master)。【过】sammasi。【过分】sammasita。【独】sammasitvā。【现分】sammasaṁ, sammasanta(sammasanto); sammasamāna; f. sammasantī。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sammasita: {'def': '[pp. of sammasati] grasped, understood, mastered J.I,78. (Page 695)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sammasitar: {'def': 'one who grasps, sees clearly Sn.69. (Page 695)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sammata: {'def': '【过分】已商定，已批准，已尊敬，已指定。(p331)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of sammannati] 1. considered as M.I,39; S.II,15; IV,127; D.III,89 (dhamma°); Vin.IV,161, 295. -- 2. honoured, revered M.II,213; J.I,49; V,79; sādhusammata considered, revered, as good D.I,47; S.IV,398. -- 3. authorized, selected, agreed upon D.III,93 (mahājana°) Vin.I,111; III,150. (Page 695)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【过分】已商定，已批准，已尊敬，已指定。samaṇesu vā samaṇasammatā，於沙门不具沙门资格。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sammati: {'def': '(sam+a), 安抚，平息，停止，休息，居住，厌倦。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '世俗;通俗', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '² [śram; Vedic śrāmyati Dhtp 220=parissama, 436=kheda] to be weary or fatigued. (Page 695)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '³ [śam to labour; pres. śamyati; pp. Vedic śamita] to work; to be satisfactory Vin.II,119 (parissāvanaṁ na s.), 278 (navakammaṁ etc. na s.). (Page 695)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [śam; Dhtp 436=upasama] 1. to be appeased, calmed; to cease Dh.5; Pot 3^rd pl. sammeyyuṁ S.I,24. -- 2. to rest, to dwell D.I,92; S.I,226; J.V,396; DA.I,262 (=vasati); pp. santa. -- Caus. sāmeti to appease, suppress, stop, A.II,24; It.82, 83, 117, 183; Dh.265. (Page 695)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(sam + a), 安抚，平息，停止，休息，居住，厌倦。(p331)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sammatta: {'def': '² (nt.) [abstr. fr. sammā] correctness, righteousness A.I,121; III,441; Pug.13; Dhs.1029; Nett 44; 96, 112; Kvu 609; DhsA.45; KvA 141; °kārin, attained to proficiency in Miln.191; sammatta-kāritā ibid. -- The 8 sammattā are the 8 aṅgas of the ariya-magga (see magga 2 a) D.III,255; the 10 are the above with the addition of sammā-ñāṇa and °vimutti A.V,240. (Page 695)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [saṁ+matta²] intoxicated, maddened, delighted D.II,266; Dh.287; J.III,188; doting on J.V,443; rogasammatta tormented by illness J.V,90 (=°pīḷita C.; v. l. °patta, as under matta²). (Page 695)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saŋ + matta), 【过分】已陶醉，已很高兴。 (sammā 的抽象) 正确性，正义。(p331)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+matta),【过分】已陶醉，已很高兴。(sammā 的抽象) 正确性，正义。sammattaniyata, 正性决定，对体证初果者的一种称呼，他一定会继续达到最高的体证(阿罗汉果)，不会改信异教。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sammatāla: {'def': '【阳】铙钹(cymbal)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】铙钹。(p331)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sammaññati: {'def': 'see sammannati. (Page 695)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sammaṭṭha: {'def': '[pp. of sammajjati] swept, cleaned, polished, smooth Vin.III,119 (su°); J.I,10; III,395 (smooth). Spelt °maṭṭa at Miln.15. (Page 695)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(sammajjati 的【过分】), 已清扫。(p331)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(sammajjati 的【过分】), 已清扫。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sammegha: {'def': '[saṁ+megha] rainy or cloudy weather J.VI,51, 52. (Page 696)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sammillabhāsinī: {'def': '(f.) [saṁ+milla=mihita,+bhāsin] speaking with smiles J.IV,24; name of a girl in Benares J.III,93 sq. (Page 696)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sammilāta: {'def': '[saṁ+milāta] withered, shrunk M.I,80. (Page 696)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sammissa: {'def': '【形】混合的。sammissatā,【阴】混合的情况。asammissatā,【阴】不混合的情况。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】混合的。 ~tā, 【阴】混合的情况。(p332)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sammissatā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. saṁ+missa] the state of being mixed, confusion DhsA.311. (Page 696)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sammisseti: {'def': '(saṁ+mis +e), 混合，搞乱。【过】sammissesi。【过分】sammissita。【独】sammissetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + mis + e), 混合，搞乱。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~sita。【独】~setvā。(p332)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sammita: {'def': '[saṁ+mita] measured, i. e. just so much, no more or less; °-bhānin Th.1, 209. (Page 696)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sammiti: {'def': 'Sammitīya: m. [BSk. Sammatīya, Sammitīya] 正量部, 三弥底部 [部派の一]', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}; {'def': 'Sammitīya m. [BSk. Sammatīya, Sammitīya] 正量部, 三弥底部 [部派の一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Sammitīya: {'def': 'Sammiti: m. [BSk. Sammatīya, Sammitīya] 正量部, 三弥底部 [部派の一]', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Sammiñjana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. sammiñjati] bending DA.I,196 (opp. pasāraṇa); VbhA.358. (Page 696)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sammiñjati: {'def': 'Sammiñjeti, Samiñjeti (saṁ+iñj(梵rñj / rj )伸展+a), 向后弯曲，加倍。【过】sammiñji。【过分】sammiñjita。【现分】sammiñjanta。【独】sammiñjitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(& Sammiñjeti) [saṁ+iñjati, see also samiñjati; cp. BSk. sammiñjayati Divy 473. See also Leumann, Album Kern, p. 393] to bend back, to double up (opp. pasārati or sampasāreti) Vin.I,5; M.I,57, 168; D.I,70; J.I,321; Vism.365 (v. l. samiñjeti); DA.I,196. -- pp. sammiñjita. (Page 696)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sammiñjita: {'def': 'Samiñjita, (pp. of sammiñjati), 已向后地弯曲(bent back )。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of sammiñjati] bent back M.I,326 (spelt samiñjita); A.II,104, 106 sq., 210. (Page 696)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sammoda: {'def': '[fr. saṁ+mud] odour, fragrance; ekagandha°, filled with fragrance J.VI,9. (Page 696)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sammodaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. sammodati] polite D.I,116; DA.I,287; a-sammodaka (f. °-ikā) Vin.I,341¹⁶. (Page 696)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】话说得友善的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】话说得友善的人。(p333)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sammodana: {'def': '(nt.) [saṁ+modana] satisfaction, compliment; °ṁ karoti to exchange politeness, to welcome VvA.141, 259. (Page 697)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sammodanā: {'def': '【阴】欢喜，道贺。sammodanīya,【形】欢喜的，愉快的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】欢喜，道贺，混合。 ~danīya, 【形】欢喜的，愉快的。(p333)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sammodati: {'def': '(saṁ+mud+a), 祝福(greetings)。【过】sammodi。【独】sammoditvā, sammoditvāna。sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā(sārāṇīyaṁ sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ vītisāreti [for which BSk. sammodanīṁ saṁrañjanīṁ vividhāṁ kathāṁ vyatisārayati, e. g. AvW II.140]), 寒喧，互相问候。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+modati] 1. to rejoice, delight; pp. sammudita (q. v.). -- 2. to agree with, to exchange friendly greeting with; aor. sammodi Vin.I,2; D.I,52; Sn.419; J.VI,224; ppr. sammodamāna in agreement, on friendly terms J.I,209; II,6; ger. sammoditvā J.II,107; grd. sammodanīya [cp. BSk. sammodanī saṁrañjanī kathā Divy 70, 156 & passim] pleasant, friendly A.V,193; cp. Sn.419; Vin.I,2; D.I,52. -- sammodita at VvA.186 read samodita. (Page 696)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saŋ + mud + a), 欢喜，高兴，互相问候。【过】 ~modi。【独】~ditvā。(p333)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sammoha: {'def': '[saṁ+moha] bewilderment, infatuation, delusion M.I,86, 136; Vin.I,183; Nd¹ 193; A.II,174; III,54 sq., 416; S.I,24; IV,206; Dhs.390. (Page 697)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sammohavinodanī: {'def': 'f. 分別論の註釈. VibhA.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Sammoheti: {'def': 'see sammuyhati. (Page 697)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sammosa: {'def': '[for *sam-mṛṣa, of mṛṣ: see mussati. sammosa after moha & musā›mosa] bewilderment, confusion D.I,19; A.I,58; II,147; S.II,224; IV,190; Vin.II,114; Miln.266, 289; Vism.63 (sati° lapse of memory). (Page 697)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'sammoha, 【阳】混乱，迷惑。(p333)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'sammoha,【阳】混乱，迷惑。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sammucchati: {'def': '(sam + mu + ya), 冲昏头脑。【过】 ~chi。【过分】 ~chita。【独】 ~chitvā。(p332)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(sam+mu知道+ya), 冲昏头脑。【过】sammucchi。【过分】sammucchita。【独】sammucchitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sammucchita: {'def': 'see samucchita. (Page 696)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sammudita: {'def': '(sammodati的【过分】),【形】高兴的(delighted, delighting in)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】高兴的。(p332)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of sammodati] delighted, delighting in Vin.I,4; M.I,503; S.IV,390. (Page 696)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sammujjanī: {'def': '(f.) [=sammajjanī] a broom J.I,161; sammuñjanī the same Miln.2. (Page 696)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sammukha: {'def': '【形】对面的，当面的。【处】在面前。sammukhā,【无】在前面，当面。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】当面的。【处】在面前。 ~khā, 【无】在前面，当面。(p332)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [saṁ+mukha] face to face with, in presence; sammukhaciṇṇa a deed done in a person’s presence J.III,27; sammukhā (Abl.) 1. face to face, before, from before D.II,155; Sn.p. 79; J.I,115; III,89 (opp. parokkhā); with Acc. Bu II.73=J.I,17; with Gen. D.I,222; II,220; M.I,146.-2. in a full assembly of qualified persons Vin.II,3; Loc. sammukhe D.II,206; J.V,461. In composition sammukha°, sammukhā° & sammukhī° (before bhū): °bhāva (°a°) presence, confrontation Miln.126; (°ī°) being face to face with, coming into one’s presence D.I,103; M.I,438; A.I,150; °bhūta (°ī°) being face to face with, confronted D.II,155; S.IV,94; Vin.II,73; A.III,404 sq.; V,226; one who has realized the saṁyojanas Kvu 483; °vinaya (°ā°) proceeding in presence, requiring the presence of a chapter of priests and of the party accused Vin.II,74, 93 sq.; IV,207; A.I,99; DhsA.144. See also yebhuyyasikā. (Page 696)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sammukhatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. sammukha] presence, confrontation Vin.II,93 (saṅgha°). (Page 696)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sammukhībhāva: {'def': '(sammukhī+bhāva)﹐对面的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sammussanatā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. saṁ+mussati] forgetfulness Dhs.14 1349; Pug.21. (Page 696)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sammussati: {'def': '(saṁ+mu+ya), 忘记(sammussati, A.I.280.)。【过】sammussi。【过分】sammuṭṭha。【独】sammussitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + mu + ya), 忘记。【过】 ~ssi。【过分】 sammuṭṭha。【独】~sitvā。(p332)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sammusā: {'def': 'M.II,202, read sammuccā (from sammuti). (Page 696)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sammuti: {'def': '【阴】一般的意见，同意，选择，许可。sammutisacca,世俗谛。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】一般的意见，同意，选择，许可。(p332)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. saṁ+man] 1. consent, permission Vin.III,199. -- 2. choice, selection, delegation Vin.III,159. ‹-› 3. fixing, determination (of boundary) Vin.I,106. ‹-› 4. common consent, general opinion, convention, that which is generally accepted; as °- conventional, e. g. °sacca conventional truth (as opposed to paramattha° the absolute truth) Miln.160; °ñāṇa common knowledge D.III,226; °deva what is called a deva J.I,132; DA.I,174; see under deva; °maraṇa what is commonly called “death” Vism.229. -- sammuccā (Instr.) by convention or common consent Sn.648 (v. l. sammacca=ger. of sammannati). -- 5. opinion, doctrine Sn.897 (=dvāsaṭṭhī diṭṭhigatāni Nd¹ 308), 904, 911. -- 6. definition, declaration, statement Vin.I,123 (ummattaka°); A.IV,347 (vādaka°); VbhA.164 (bhuñjaka°). -- 7. a popular expression, a mere name or word Miln.28. ‹-› 8. tradition, lore; comb^d with suti at Miln.3. (Page 696)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sammuyhana: {'def': '【中】遗忘，困惑。(p332)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】遗忘，困惑。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [saṁ+muyhana] bewilderment DA.I,193 (Page 696)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sammuyhati: {'def': '(saŋ + muh + ya), 忘记，迷惑，弄糊涂。【过】 ~yhi。【过分】~mūḷha。【独】 ~yhitvā。 ~muyha。(p332)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+ muh(梵muh)昏迷+ya),迷惑，弄糊涂。【过】sammuyhi。【过分】sammūḷha。【独】sammuyhitvā。sammuyha。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+muyhati] to be bewildered, infatuated, muddle-headed J.IV,385; Miln.42. -- pp. sammūḷha D.II,85; M.I,250; A.I,165; Sn.583; Caus. sammoheti to befool Miln.224. (Page 696)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sammuñjanī: {'def': '【阴】扫帚(broom)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】扫帚。(p332)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sammuṭṭha: {'def': '[saṁ+muṭṭha] confused M.I,21; S.IV,125; V,331; one who has forgotten Vin.IV,4⁵ (=na ssarati); III,165¹³; °ssati id. A.I,280. (Page 696)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+muṭṭha, sammussati 的【过分】), 已糊涂，已忘记(confused , one who has forgotten(=na ssarati))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(sammussati 的【过分】)。(p332)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sammā: {'def': '¹ [cp. Sk. śamyā] a pin of the yoke Abhp 449; a kind of sacrificial instrument SnA 321 (sammaṁ ettha pāsantī ti sammāpāso; and sātrā-yāgass’etaṁ adhivacanaṁ). Cp. Weber Indische Streifen I.36, and sammāpāsa, below. (Page 695)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【无】正，适当地，正确地，彻底地(日语：思い切り,o-mo-i-ki-li)。《杂阿含790经》：「何等为正？谓人，天，涅盘。」sammājīva,【阳】正命。sammākammanta,【阳】正业。sammadaññā,【阳】正智(It.A.：sammadaññāti sammā aññāya.正智：正完全智)。sammādiṭṭhi,【阴】正见。sammādiṭṭhika,【形】有正见的。sammāpaṭipatti,【阴】正行，正行道。sammāpaṭipanna,【阳】正行者。sammāvattanā,【阴】正操行。sammāvācā,【阴】正语。sammāvāyāma,【阳】正精进。sammāvimutti,【阴】正解脱。sammāsaṅkappa,【阳】正思维。sammāsati,【阴】正念。sammāsamādhi,【阳】正定。sammāsambuddha,【阳】三藐三菩陀，正自觉。sammāsambodhi,【阴】正觉悟。SA.25.1-10︰okkanto sammattaniyāmanti paviṭṭho ariyamaggaṁ.(入正决定(正性离生)：已进入圣道。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² (indecl.) [Vedic samyac (=samyak) & samīś “connected, in one”; see under saṁ°] thoroughly, properly, rightly; in the right way, as it ought to be, best, perfectly (opp. micchā) D.I,12; Vin.I,12; Sn.359; 947; Dh.89, 373. Usually as °-, like sammā-dhārā even or proper showers (i. e. at the right time) Pv.II,9⁷⁰; especially in connection with constituents of the eightfold Aryan Path, where it is contrasted with micchā; see magga 2 a. (e. g. VbhA.114 sq., 121, 320 sq.). ‹-› The form sammā is reduced to samma° before short vowels (with the insertion of a sandhi --d-, cp. puna-deva), like samma-d-eva properly, in harmony or completeness D.I,110; Vin.I,9: PvA.139, 157; samma-daññā & °akkhāta (see below); and before double consonants arisen from assimilation, like sammag-gata (=samyak+gata). The cpds. we shall divide into two groups, viz. (A) cpds. with samma°, (B) with sammā°.

A. --akkhāta well preached Dh.86. --aññā perfect knowledge Vin.I,183; S.I,4; IV,128; Dh.57 (°vimutta, cp. DhA.I,434); It.38, 79, 93, 95, 108. --attha a proper or good thing or cause J.VI,16. --ddasa having right views A.II,18; S.IV,205, 207; Sn.733; It.47, 61, 81; Kvu 339. --ggata [cp. BSk. samyaggata Divy 399] who has wandered rightly, perfect M.I,66; who has attained the highest point, an Arahant D.I,55; S.I,76; A.I,269; IV,226; V,265; J.III,305; It.87; Ap 218. Also sammāgata Vin.II,203¹⁷. --ppajāna having right knowledge Dh.20; It.115. --ppaññā right knowledge, true wisdom Vin.I,14; Dh.57, 190; Sn.143; It.17; Miln.39. --ppadhāna [cp. BSk. samyakprahāna Divy 208] right exertion Vin.I,22; Dhs.358; Dpvs 18, 5; they are four D.II,120; M.III,296; explained M.II,11 (anuppannānaṁ pāpakānaṁ akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ anuppādāya; uppannānaṁ pahānāya; anuppannānaṁ kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ uppādāya; uppannānaṁ ṭhitiyā).

B. --ājīva right living, right means of livelihood, right occupation Vin.I,10; S.V,421, etc.; formula D.II,312; (adj.) living in the right way M.I,42; A.II,89. --kammanta right conduct, right behaviour Vin.I,10; S.V,421 etc.; definition D.II,312; Dhs.300; adj. behaving in the right way M.I,42; A.II,89. --ñāṇa right knowledge, enlightenment, results from right concentration D.II,217; A.I,292; adj. M.I,42. --ñāṇin possessing the right insight A.II,89, 222. --dassana right views Vism.605. --diṭṭhi right views, right belief, the first stage of the noble eightfold path, consists in the knowledge of the four truths D.II,311; its essence is knowledge Dhs.20, 297, 317; cp. Vism.509; comprises the knowledge of the absence of all permanent Being and the reality of universal conditioned Becoming S.II,17; III,135; and of the impermanence of the 5 Khandhas S.III,51=IV.142; and of Sīla, of causation and of the destruction of the Āsavas M.I,46--55; how obtained M.I,294; two degrees of M.III,72; supremely important A.I,30--2 292 sq.; (adj.) Miln.I,47. --diṭṭhika having the right belief D.I,139; A.II,89; 220 sq.; III,115, 138; IV,290; V,124 sq.; S.IV,322. --dvayatānupassin duly considering both-i. e. misery with its origin, the destruction of misery with the path, respectively Sn.p. 140. --dhārā a heavy shower S.V,379. --paṭipatti right mental disposition A.I,69; Nett 27; Miln.97; sammāpaṭipadā Pug.49 sq.; DhA.IV,127; sammāpaṭipanna rightly disposed, having the right view D.I,8, 55; Pug.49 sq. --passaṁ viewing the matter in the right way S.III,51; IV,142. --pāsa [Sk. śamyāprāsa, but BSk. śamyaprāśa Divy 634] a kind of sacrifice Sn.303; A.II,42; IV,151; S.I,76; It.21; J.IV,302; SnA 321. Cp. sammā¹. --manasikāra right, careful, thought D.I,13; DA.I,104. --vattanā strict, proper, conduct Vin.I,46, 50; II,5. --vācā right speech Vin.I,10; DA.I,314; definition D.II,312; Dhs.299; (adj.) speaking properly M.I,42; A.II,89. --vāyāma right effort Vin.I,10; Dhs.13, 22, 302; definition D.II,312; adj. M.I,42; A.II,89. --vimutta right emancipation A.I,292; °vimutti the same D.II,217; A.II,196, 222; (adj.) M.I,42; A.II,89. --saṅkappa right resolve, right intention Dh.12; Vin.I,10; Dhs.21, 298; definition D.II,312; (adj.) M.I,42; A.II,89. --sati right memory, right mindfulness, self-possession Vin.I,10; Dhs.23, 303; definition D.II,313; (adj.) M.I,42; A.II,89. --samādhi right concentration, the last stage of the noble eightfold path Vin.I,10; Dhs.24, 304; definition D.II,313; adj. M.I,12; A.II,89. --sampassaṁ having the right view S.IV,142. --sambuddha perfectly enlightened, a universal Buddha Vin.I,5; D.I,49; Dh.187; J.I,44; DhA.I,445; III,241; VbhA.436, etc. --sambodhi perfect enlightenment, supreme Buddhaship Vin.I,11; D.II,83; S.I,68, etc. (Page 695)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【无】正，适当地，正确地，彻底地。 ~ājīva, 【阳】正命。 ~kammanta,【阳】正业。 ~diṭṭhi, 【阴】正见。 ~diṭṭhika, 【形】有正见的。 ~paṭipatti,【阴】正行，正行道。 ~paṭipanna, 【阳】正行者。 ~vattanā, 【阴】正操行。 ~vācā, 【阴】正语。 ~vāyāma, 【阳】正精进。 ~vimutti, 【阴】正解脱。 ~saṅkappa, 【阳】正思维。 ~sati, 【阴】正念。 ~samādhi, 【阳】正定。 ~sambuddha, 【阳】三藐三菩陀，正自觉。 ~sambodhi, 【阴】正觉悟。(p332)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sammādiṭṭhi: {'def': '【阴】正见。S.45.8./V,8-9.「正见」这一项说：“Katamā ca, bhikkhave, sammādiṭṭhi？ Yaṁ kho, bhikkhave, dukkhe ñāṇaṁ, dukkhasamudaye ñāṇaṁ dukkhanirodhe ñāṇaṁ, dukkhanirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāya ñāṇaṁ--ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, sammādiṭṭhi.”(诸比丘！什么是正见？诸比丘！1苦之智(SA.45.8./III,123.︰dukkhe ñāṇanti savanasammasanapaṭivedhapaccavekkhaṇavasena catūhākārehi uppannaṁ ñāṇaṁ. 於四种行相，已生起畅通思惟、贯通省察自在之智)、2苦集之智、3苦灭之智、4导致苦灭之道之智。诸比丘！这称为正见。)SA.45.1~2./III,117.︰Sammādiṭṭhīti yāthāvadiṭṭhi niyyānikadiṭṭhi.(正见︰正确的见解和有利可图的见解。) DhsA.CS:p.173︰Sammā passati, sobhanā vā diṭṭhīti sammādiṭṭhi.( 正确地看见，或美的知见，为‘正见’。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sammākammanta: {'def': '【阳】正业。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sammāna: {'def': '【阳】sammānanā,【阴】敬礼，尊敬。sammānāvamānakkhamo(sammāna尊敬+avamāna轻视+khamo宽恕)﹐宽恕称扬、毁訾。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】 sammānanā, 【阴】敬礼，尊敬。(p332)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. saṁ+man] honour J.I,182; VI,390; Sdhp.355. (Page 696)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sammānanā: {'def': '(f.) [saṁ+mānanā] honouring, veneration D.III,190; Miln.162, 375, 386. (Page 696)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sammāpaṇidhi: {'def': '﹐正誓愿。attasammāpaṇidhi﹐自持正誓愿(即「四摄事」的「利行」)(自持正誓愿：这类的自己无戒立戒，无信令信，悭者令舍(，恶智令建立正智)。Attasammāpaṇidhi nāma idhekacco attānaṁ dussīlaṁ sīle patiṭṭhāpeti, assaddhaṁ saddhāsampadāya patiṭṭhāpeti, macchariṁ cāgasampadāya patiṭṭhāpeti.) (见《小诵注释》KhA.CS:p.112.；《杂阿含668经》)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sammāsambuddha: {'def': '【阳】三藐三菩陀，正自觉。A.1.13./I,22.︰“Tathāgato arahaṁ sammāsambuddho. Ayaṁ kho, bhikkhave, ekapuggalo loke uppajjamāno uppajjati 1adutiyo 2asahāyo 3appaṭimo 4appaṭisamo 5appaṭibhāgo 6appaṭipuggalo 7asamo 8asamasamo 9dvipadānaṁ aggo”ti.(世尊说：)(如来是阿罗汉、正自觉者。诸比丘！有一个人出现於世是1独一无二、2无双、3无比、4无等比、5无同等、6无等同之补伽罗、7无敌、8无敌中的无敌、9两足尊。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sammāvāyāma: {'def': '【阳】正精进。D.22./II,313.(=S.45.8./V,9.)︰“Katamo ca, bhikkhave, sammāvāyāmo? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu anuppannānaṁ pāpakānaṁ akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ anuppādāya 1chandaṁ janeti 2vāyamati 3vīriyaṁ ārabhati 4cittaṁ paggaṇhāti padahati; uppannānaṁ pāpakānaṁ akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ pahānāya 1chandaṁ janeti 2vāyamati 3vīriyaṁ ārabhati 4cittaṁ paggaṇhāti padahati; anuppannānaṁ kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ uppādāya 1chandaṁ janeti 2vāyamati 3vīriyaṁ ārabhati 4cittaṁ paggaṇhāti padahati; uppannānaṁ kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ ṭhitiyā asammosāya bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā 1chandaṁ janeti 2vāyamati 3vīriyaṁ ārabhati 4cittaṁ paggaṇhāti padahati. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, sammāvāyāmo.(又，诸比丘！什么是‘正精进’？诸比丘！於此，比丘令不生未生之恶不善法，而1起欲、2精进、3发奋、4策励心；为断已生之诸恶不善法，而1起欲、2精进、3发奋、4策励心；为生起未生之诸善法，而1起欲、2精进、3发奋、4策励心；为延续已生之诸善法，不混乱、倍修习、广修习、圆满，而1起欲、2精进、3发奋、4策励心。诸比丘！这被称为正精进。) 「1起欲、2精进、3发奋、4策励心」，《中阿含86经》(T1.563.1)作︰「发欲求、方便、精勤、举心灭」，《中阿含222经》(T1.806.1)︰「起欲求、方便、行精勤、举心断」。其中「断」、「灭」是误译，padahati, padhāna-是「努力、精勤」，不是「断、灭」(pajahati, pahāna-；梵prajahāti, prahāṇa)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sammīñjati: {'def': '(saŋ + iñj + a), 向后地弯曲，加倍。【过】 ~ñji。【过分】 ~jita。【现分】 ~janta。【独】 ~jitvā。(p332)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sammūḷha: {'def': '[saṁ+mūḷha] infatuated, bewildered D.II,85; M.I,250; A.I,165; Sn.583; J.V,294; Tikp 366. (Page 696)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(sammuyhati 的【过分】), 已忘记，已弄糊涂。(p333)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(sammuyhati 的【过分】), 已忘记，已弄糊涂。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samocita: {'def': '[saṁ+ocita] gathered, arranged J.V,156 (=surocita C.). (Page 689)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samodahana: {'def': '【中】保存，放进。(p327)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】保存，放进。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samodahati: {'def': '(saṁ+ava下+dah放置+a), 集合，存入。【过】samodahi。【过分】samodahita。【独】samodahitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + ava + dah + a), 集合，存入。【过】 ~dahi。【过分】~dahita。【独】 ~dahitvā。(p327)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+odahati] to put together, supply, apply S. I.7; IV,178 sq.; to fix Nett 165, 178; ppr. samodahaṁ S.I,7=IV.179; ger. samodahitvā S.IV,178; & samodhāya Vism.105; Sdhp.588. -- pp. samohita. (Page 689)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samodakaṁ: {'def': '(adv.) [saṁ+odakaṁ] at the water’s edge Vin.I,6=M.I,169=D.II,38. (Page 689)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samodhāna: {'def': '(saṁ+odhāna, cp. Odahana),【中】配置，联谊，联合，被容纳(collocation, combination)。saṅghaṭṭanasamodhāna,【中】互相摩擦。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】配置，联合，被容纳。(p328)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [saṁ+odhāna, cp. odahana] collocation, combination Bu II.59=J.I,14; S.IV,215=V.212; application (of a story) J.II,381. samodhānaṁ gacchati to come together, to combine, to be contained in Vin.I,62; M.I,184=S.I,86; V,43, 231=A.V,21 (Com. odhānapakkhepaṁ) A.III,364; SnA 2; Vism.7; VbhA.107; samodhānagata wrapped together Miln.362; samodhānaparivāsa a combined, inclusive probation Vin.II,48 sq. (Page 689)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samodhānatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. samodhāna] combination, application, pursuance, in vutti° J.III,541 (so read for vatti°). (Page 689)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samodhāneti: {'def': '(samodhāna 的【派】), 连接，合并起来。【过】samodhānesi。【独】samodhānetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[denom. fr. samodhāna] to combine, put together, connect J.I,9, 14; DA.I,18; SnA 167, 193, 400; especially jātakaṁ s. to apply a Jātaka to the incident J.I,106, 171; II,381 & passim. (Page 689)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(samodhāna 的【派】), 连接，合并起来。【过】 ~esi。【独】~netvā。(p328)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samodita: {'def': 'united VvA.186 (so read for samm°), 320; cp. samudita. (Page 689)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samoha: {'def': 'infatuated Pug.61. (Page 689)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】昏头昏脑的，入迷的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】昏头昏脑的，入迷的。(p328)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samohita: {'def': '(samodahati 的【过分】), 已包括，已覆盖，已合并起来。(p328)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(samodahati 的【过分】), 已包括，已覆盖，已合并起来。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of samodahati] 1. put together, joined J.VI,261 (su°). -- 2. connected with, covered with Nd¹ 149 (for pareta); Miln.346 (raja-paṅka°). (Page 689)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samokirati: {'def': '(saŋ + ava + kir + a), 洒，散播。【过】 ~kiri。【独】 ~kiritvā。(p327)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+ava下+kir散+a), 洒，散播。【过】samokiri。【独】samokiritvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+okirati] to sprinkle Bu II.178=J.I,27. ‹-› pp. samokiṇṇa. (Page 689)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samokiraṇa: {'def': '【中】洒水，散播。(p327)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】洒水，散播。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samokiṇṇa: {'def': '(samokirati的【过分】) 洒，散播。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of samokirati] besprinkled, covered (with) J.I,233. (Page 689)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samorodha: {'def': '(saṁ+orodha),障碍物，迟钝(barricading, torpor)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+orodha] barricading, torpor Dhs.1157; DhsA.379. (Page 689)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samorohati: {'def': '[saṁ+orohati] to descend; ger. samoruyha Mhvs 10, 35. (Page 689)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samosarati: {'def': '(saṁ+ava下+sar(梵sr)动转+a), 聚集，集合。【过】samosari。【过分】samosaṭa。【独】samosaritvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + ava + sar + a), 聚集，集合。【过】 ~sari。【过分】 ~saṭa。【独】 ~saritvā。(p328)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+osarati] 1. to flow down together Miln.349. -- 2. to come together, gather J.I,178 (see on this Kern, Toev. II.60). (Page 689)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samosaraṇa: {'def': '【中】集合，会议。(p328)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】集合，会议。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [saṁ+osaraṇa] coming together, meeting, union, junction D.I,237; II,61; S.III,156; V,42 sq., 91; A.III,364; Miln.38. (Page 689)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samotarati: {'def': '(saŋ + ava + tar + a), 下去（水里）。【过】 ~tari。【过分】 ~tiṇṇa。【独】 ~taritvā。(p327)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+ava下+tar+a), 下去(水里)。【过】samotari。【过分】samotiṇṇa。【独】samotaritvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+otarati] to descend Mhvs 10, 57. (Page 689)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samotata: {'def': '【过分】已到处撒满，已散布。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【过分】已到处撒满，已散布。(p327)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+otata] strewn all over, spread Vv 81⁶ (vv. ll. samogata and samohata); J.I,183; Ap 191. (Page 689)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampabhāsa: {'def': '[saṁ+pa+bhāṣ] frivolous talk S.V,355. (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampabhāsati: {'def': '[saṁ+pa+bhās] to shine Miln.338. (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampacura: {'def': '(adj.) [saṁ+pacura] abundant, very many A.II,59, 61; S.I,110. (Page 690)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampaddavati: {'def': '[saṁ+pa+dru] to run away; aor. sampaddavi J.VI,53. -- pp. sampadduta. (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampadduta: {'def': '[pp. of sampaddavati] run away J.VI,53. (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampadhūpeti: {'def': '(°dhūpāyati, °dhūpāti) [saṁ+padhūpāti] to send forth (thick) smoke, to fill with smoke or incense, to pervade, permeate S.I,169; Vin.I,225; Sn.p. 15; Miln.333. Cp. sandhūpāyati. (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampaditta: {'def': '[saṁ+paditta] kindled Sdhp.33. (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampadosa: {'def': '【阳】坏，邪恶，不道德。(p328)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+padosa ),【阳】恶毒(wickedness)，不道德。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+padosa¹] wickedness Dhs.1060; a-sampadosa innocence J.VI,317=VI,321. (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampadussana: {'def': '【中】腐败。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】腐败。(p328)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sampadussati: {'def': '(saṁ+pa+dus +ya), 被腐烂。【过】sampadussi。【过分】sampaduṭṭha。【独】sampadussitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + pa + dus + ya), 被腐烂。【过】 ~dussi。【过分】~paduṭṭha。【独】 ~sitvā。(p328)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+padussati] to be corrupted, to trespass Vin.IV,260; J.II,193; pp. sampaduṭṭha. (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampaduṭṭha: {'def': '[saṁ+paduṭṭha] corrupted, wicked J.VI,317 (a°); Sdhp.70. (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampadā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. saṁ+pad, cp. BSk. sampadā Divy 401 (devamanuṣya°), also sampatti] 1. attainment, success, accomplishment; happiness, good fortune; blessing, bliss A.I,38; Pv.II,9⁴⁷ (=sampatti PvA.132). -- Sampadā in its pregnant meaning is applied to the accomplishments of the individual in the course of his religious development. Thus it is used with sīla, citta, & paññā at D.I,171 sq. and many other passages in an almost encyclopedic sense. Here with sīla° the whole of the sīlakkhandha (D.I,63 sq.) is understood; citta° means the cultivation of the heart & attainments of the mind relating to composure, concentration and religious meditation, otherwise called samādhikkhandha. It includes those stages of meditation which are enum^d under samādhi. With paññā° are meant the attainments of higher wisdom and spiritual emancipation, connected with supernormal faculties, culminating in Arahantship and extinction of all causes of rebirth, otherwise called vijjā (see the 8 items of this under vijjā b.). The same ground as by this 3 fold division is covered by the enumeration of 5 sampadās as sīla°, samādhi°, paññā°, vimutti°, vimutti-ñāṇadassana° M.I,145; Pug.54; cp. S.I,139; A.III,12.

The term sampadā is not restricted to a definite set of accomplishments. It is applied to various such sets besides the one mentioned above. Thus we find a set of 3 sampadās called sīla°, citta° & diṭṭhi° at A.I,269, where under sīla the Nos. 1--7 of the 10 sīlas are understood (see sīla 2 a), under citta Nos. 8 & 9, under diṭṭhi No. 10. ‹-› sīla & diṭṭhi° also at D.III,213. -- A set of 8 sampadās is given at A.IV,322 with uṭṭhāna°, ārakkha°, kalyāṇamittatā, sammājīvitā, saddhā°, sīla°, cāga°, paññā°; of which the first 4 are expl^d in detail at A.IV,281=322 as bringing wordly happiness, viz. alertness, wariness, association with good friends, right livelihood; and the last 4 as leading to future bliss (viz. faith in the Buddha, keeping the 5 sīlas, liberality, higher wisdom) at A.IV,284=324. Another set of 5 frequently mentioned is: ñāti°, bhoga°, ārogya°, sīla°, diṭṭhi° (or the blessings, i. e. good fortune, of having relatives, possessions, health, good conduct, right views) representing the “summa bona” of popular choice, to which is opposed deficiency (vyasana, reverse) of the same items. Thus e. g. at A.III,147; D.III,235. ‹-› Three sampadās: kammanta°, ājīva°, diṭṭhi,° i. e. the 7 sīlas, right living (sammā-ājīva), right views A.I,271. -- Another three as saddhā°, sīla°, paññā° at A.I,287. ‹-› Bdhgh at DhA.III,93, 94 speaks of four sampadās, viz. vatthu°, paccaya°, cetanā°, guṇâtireka°; of the blessings of a foundation (for merit), ofmeans (for salvation), of good intentions, of virtue (& merit). -- A (later) set of seven sampadās is given at J.IV,96 with āgama°, adhigama°, pubbahetu°, attattha-paripucchā°, titthavāsa°, yoniso -- manasikāra°, buddh’ûpanissaya°. -- Cp. the following: atta° S.V,30 sq.; ākappa° A.I,38; ājīva° A.I,271; DA.I,235; kamma° A.IV,238 sq.; dassana° Sn.231; nibbāna° Vism.58; bhoga° (+parivāra°) DhA.I,78; yāga° ThA.40 (Ap. V,7); vijjācaraṇa° D.I,99. 2. execution, performance; result, consequence; thus yañña° successful performance of a sacrifice D.I,128; Sn.505, 509; piṭaka-sampadāya “on the authority of the Piṭaka tradition,” according to the P.; in exegesis of iti-kira (hearsay) A.I,189=II.191=Nd² 151; and of itihītiha M.I,520=II.169. (Page 690)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampadālana: {'def': '【中】撕裂，裂开。(p328)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】撕裂，裂开。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sampadāleti: {'def': '[saṁ+padāleti] to tear, to cut M.I,450; A.II,33=S.III,85; S.III,155; Mhvs 23, 10. -- Act. intrs. sampadālati to burst J.VI,559 (=phalati, C.). (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampadāna: {'def': '(nt.) [saṁ+padāna] the dative relation J.V,214 (upayogatthe), 237 (karaṇatthe); SnA 499 (°vacana). (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】转给，移交。【文法】与格(Dat. dative)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】转给，移交，与格〔巴利语法〕。(p328)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sampadāti: {'def': '[saṁ+padāti] to hand on, give over J.IV,204 (aor. °padāsi). (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampadāḷeti: {'def': '(saŋ + pa + dal + e), 撕，劈开，猛然打开。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~lita。【独】 ~letvā。(p328)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+pa+dal爆炸+e), 撕，劈开，猛然打开。【过】sampadāḷesi。【过分】sampadālita。【独】sampadāletvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sampaggaha: {'def': '[saṁ+paggaha] support, patronage Mhvs 4, 44. (Page 689)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampaggahīta: {'def': '[saṁ+paggahīta] uplifted Miln.309. (Page 689)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampaggaṇhāti: {'def': '[saṁ+pagganhāti] 1. to exert, strain DhsA.372. -- 2. to show a liking for, to favour, befriend J.VI,294. -- pp. sampaggahīta. (Page 689)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampaggāha: {'def': 'assumption, arrogance Dhs.1116. (Page 690)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampaghosa: {'def': 'sound, noise Mhbv 45. (Page 690)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampahaŋsaka: {'def': '【形】喜悦的。 ~sana, 【中】高兴，愉快。(p329)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sampahaŋsana: {'def': '【中】喜悦。(p329)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sampahaŋsati: {'def': '(saŋ + pa + has + a), 很高兴。【过】 ~ŋsi。【使】sampahaŋseti。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~sita。【独】 ~setvā。(p329)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sampahaṁsaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. next] gladdening M.I,146; A.II,97; IV,296, 328; V,155; It.107; Miln.373. (Page 692)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】喜悦的。sampahaṁsana,【中】高兴，愉快。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sampahaṁsana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. sampahaṁsati] being glad, pleasure; approval Ps.I,167; Vism.148 (°ā); KhA 100 (“evaṁ”); SnA 176 (“sādhu”); Sdhp.568. (Page 692)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】喜悦。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sampahaṁsati: {'def': '(saṁ+pa+has+a), 很高兴。【过】sampahaṁsi。【使】sampahaṁseti。【过】sampahaṁesi。【过分】sampahaṁsita。【独】sampahaṁsetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+pahaṁsati²] to be glad; pp. sampahaṭṭha. --Caus. sampahaṁseti to gladden, delight Vin.I,18; D.I,126. (Page 692)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampahaṭṭha: {'def': '(sampahaṁsati 的【过分】), 已喜悦，已欢喜，已打败，已精炼，已形成。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(sampahaŋsati 的【过分】), 已喜悦，已欢喜，已打败，已精炼，已形成。(p329)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² [saṁ+pahaṭṭha²] gladdened, joyful Sdhp.301. (Page 692)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (adj.) [saṁ+pahaṭṭha¹] beaten, struck (of metal), refined, wrought S.I,65 (sakusala°; Bdhgh: ukkāmukhe pacitvā s.; K.S. I.321); Sn.686 (sukusala°; SnA 486: “kusalena suvaṇṇakārena saṅghaṭṭitaṁ saṅghaṭṭentena tāpitaṁ”). (Page 692)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampahāra: {'def': '【阳】争吵，战争，打击。(p329)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】争吵，战争，打击。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+pahāra] clashing, beating together, impact, striking; battle, strife D.II,166; Pug.66 sq.; DA.I,150; Miln.161 (ūmi-vega°), 179 (of two rocks), 224. (Page 692)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampajañña: {'def': '〔正知，〕透过直观而得的现量智。[62]', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}; {'def': '(fr. sampajāna),【中】明觉，正知，辨别，理解(attention, consideration, discrimination, comprehension, circumspection；opp. to muṭṭha-sacca+ asampajañña)。SA.47.2./III,182~190. (cf. VbhA.p.347~364.)说「四种明觉」(Catubbidhañhi sampajaññaṁ)：(1)有益明觉(sātthaka-sampajañña)、(2)合宜明觉(sappāya-sampajañña)、(3)行处明觉(gocara-sampajañña)、(4)无痴明觉(asammoha-sampajañña)。(1)「有益明觉」是在生起念头时，就能在有益及无益之间作出选择有益处的。(诸比丘！若难陀应看东方时，集中一切心之后，难陀才看东方，(想)：『如是我当看东方，令贪、忧之恶不善法不漏入。』如是，於其处而有正知。) 应看西方、北方、南方、上、下、四维，也同样作法。(2)「合宜明觉」是能够於适宜与不适宜之间作出选择适宜的。(3)「行处明觉」是不舍弃业处。举托钵作例子︰「(1)有一类比丘(把他的业处)带去(harati)，没有带回(na paccāharati)；(2)另一类没有带去，但带回；(3)另一类没有带去，也没有带回；(4)另一类带去带回。」第4类比丘是实践「往返的任务」(gatapaccāgatavattaṁ)。实践‘回原处重走’的「往返的任务」者(haraṇapaccāharaṇasaṅkhātaṁ gatapaccāgatavattaṁ pūrento)(如︰黑藤堂的大龙长老(Kāḷavallimaṇḍapavāsī Mahānāgatthero)决定只有在心专注於业处之下才提脚，而如果在心脱离了业处之下提脚时，他即会转身走回原处)，如果他有证果的潜能(upanissayasampanno)，他甚至於能在生命的第一阶段就证得阿罗汉果。(4)「无痴明觉」则是在向前走等各方面没有愚痴。他不像普通人想：「‘我’向前移动；向前移动由‘我’产生」。当「我将向前移动」的识生起时，心生风界跟那识同时生起，而产生了动作(viññatti身表)。通过心的活动(心生色)，产生散播至全身的风界而向前移动。注释书对‘回原处重走’的行者(haraṇapaccāharaṇasaṅkhātaṁ)给予极高的评价。(SA.47.2./III,189.、VbhA.p.354.)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】辨别，理解。(p328)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. sampajāna, i. e. *sampajānya] attention, consideration, discrimination, comprehension, circumspection A.I,13 sq.; II,93; III,307; IV,320; V,98 sq.; S.III,169; D.III,213 (sati+samp. opp. to muṭṭha-sacca+ asampajañña), 273. Description of it in detail at DA.I,183 sq.=VbhA.347 sq., where given as fourfold, viz. sātthaka°, sappāya°, gocara°, asammoha°, with examples. Often combined with sati, with which almost synonymous, e. g. at D.I,63; A.I,43; II,44 sq.; V,115, 118. (Page 690)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '正知;正智', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Sampajjalita: {'def': '(sampajjalati 的【过分】), 已燃烧著，已著火。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [saṁ+pajjalita] in flames, ablaze A.IV,131; Vin.I,25; D.I,95; II,335; J.I,232; Miln.84. (Page 690)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(sampajjalati 的【过分】), 已燃烧着，已着火。(p328)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sampajjana: {'def': '【中】成功，繁荣，成为。(p328)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】成功，繁荣，成为。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sampajjati: {'def': '(saṁ+pad去+ya), 成功，兴隆，发生，变成。【过】sampajji。【过分】sampanna。【现分】sampajjamāna。【独】sampajjitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + pad + ya), 成功，兴隆，发生，变成。【过】 ~pajji。【过分】 ~panna。【现分】 ~jjamāna。【独】 ~jitvā。(p328)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+pajjati] 1. to come to, to fall to; to succeed, prosper J.I,7; II,105. -- 2. to turn out, to happen, become D.I,91, 101, 193, 239; PvA.192. aor. sampādi D.II,266, 269. -- pp. sampanna. -- Caus. sampādeti. (Page 690)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampajāna: {'def': '(adj.) [saṁ+pajāna, cp. pajānāti; BSk. samprajāna, MVastu I.206; II,360] thoughtful, mindful, attentive, deliberate, almost syn. with sata, mindful D.I,37; II,94 sq.; Sn.413, 931; It.10, 42; Pug.25; D.III,49, 58, 221, 224 sq.; A.IV,47 sq., 300 sq., 457 sq.; Nd¹ 395; Nd² 141. sampajānakārin acting with consideration or full attention D.I,70; II,95, 292; A.II,210; V,206; VbhA.347 sq.; DA.I,184 sq.; sampājanamusāvāda deliberate lie Vin.IV,2; It.18; D.III,45; A.I,128; IV,370; V,265; J.I,23. (Page 690)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】深思的。(p328)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+pajāna, cp. Pajānāti；梵 Samprajāna),【形】深思的，知道的(thoughtful, mindful, attentive, deliberate, almost syn. with sata, mindful)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sampajānakārī: {'def': '(sampajānakārin),【形】全然知者，完整知者(acting with consideration or full attention)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sampajānāti: {'def': '[saṁ+pajānāti] to know S.V,154; Sn.1055; Nd² 655. (Page 690)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampakampati: {'def': '(saŋ + pa + kamp + a), 战栗，被摇动。【过】 ~mpi。【过分】 ~pita。(p328)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+pakampati] to tremble, to be shaken Vin.I,12; D.II,12, 108; M.I,227; III,120. -- Caus. sampakampeti to shake D.II,108. (Page 689)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+pa彻底+kamp摇动+a), 战栗，被摇动。【过】sampakampi。【过分】sampakampita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sampakkhandana: {'def': '(nt.) [saṁ+pakkhandana] aspiration Miln.34 sq. (Page 689)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampakkhandati: {'def': '[saṁ+pakkhandati, cp. BSk. sampraskandati MVastu II.157] to aspire to, to enter into Miln.35. (Page 689)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampakopa: {'def': '[saṁ+pakopa] indignation Dhs.1060. (Page 689)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampalibhagga: {'def': '[pp. of next] broken up S.I,123. (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampalibhañjati: {'def': '[saṁ+pari+bhañj] to break, to crack M.I,234; S.I,123; pp. sampalibhagga. (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampalibodha: {'def': '[saṁ+palibodha] hindrance, obstruction Nett 79. (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampalimaṭṭha: {'def': '[saŋ+palimaṭṭha] 接触，把持，破坏(touched, handled, blotted out, destroyed)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+palimaṭṭha] touched, handled, blotted out, destroyed S.IV,168 sq.=J.III,532=Vism.36. (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampaliveṭheti: {'def': '[saṁ+paliveṭheti] to wrap up, envelop; °eyya AIV.131 (kāyaṁ). (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampaliveṭhita: {'def': '(adj.) [saṁ+paliveṭhita] wrapped up, enveloped M.I,281. (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampamaddati: {'def': '[saṁ+pamaddati] to crush out Miln.403. (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampamathita: {'def': '[saṁ+pamathita] altogether crushed or overwhelmed J.VI,189. (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampamodati: {'def': '[saṁ+pamodati] to rejoice Vv 36⁸. -- pp. sampamodita. (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampamodita: {'def': '[saṁ+pamodita] delighted, rejoicing Sdhp.301. (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampamūḷha: {'def': '(adj.) [saṁ+pamūḷha] confounded Sn.762. (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampanna: {'def': '(sampajjati 的【过分】), 已成功，已完全，已富於，已具有。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(sampajjati 的【过分】), 已成功，已完全，已富于，已具有。(p328)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of sampajjati] 1. successful, complete, perfect Vin.II,256; sampannaveyyākaraṇa a full explanation Sn.352. -- 2. endowed with, possessed of, abounding in Vin.I,17; Sn.152, 727 (ceto-vimutti°); J.I,421; vijjācaraṇasampanna full of wisdom and goodness D.I,49; Sn.164; often used as first part of a compound, e. g. sampannavijjācaraṇa Dh.144; DhA.III,86; sampannasīla virtuous It.118; Dh.57; sampannodaka abounding in water J.IV,125. -- 3. sweet, well cooked Vin.II,196; Miln.395. (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampaphulla: {'def': '(adj.) [saṁ+pa+phulla] blooming, blossoming Sdhp.245. (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampareta: {'def': '(adj.) [saṁ+pareta] surrounded, beset with J.II,317; III,360=S.I,143. (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samparibhinna: {'def': '(adj.) [saṁ+paribhinna] broken up J.VI,113 (°gatta). (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samparikantati: {'def': '[saṁ+parikantati] to cut all round M.III,275. (Trenckner reads sampakantati.) (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samparikaḍḍhati: {'def': '[saṁ+parikaḍḍhati] to pull about, drag along M.I,228. (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saŋ + pari + kaḍḍh + a), 到处拖。(p328)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+pari+kaḍḍh+a), 到处拖。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samparikiṇṇa: {'def': '[saṁ+parikiṇṇa] surrounded by Vin.III,86; Miln.155. (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samparitāpeti: {'def': '[saṁ+paritāpeti] to make warm, heat, scourge M.I,128, 244=S.IV,57. (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samparivajjeti: {'def': '(saṁ+pari+vaj+e), 避免，避开。【过】samparivajjesi。【过分】samparivajjita。【独】samparivajjetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+parivajjeti] to avoid, shun Sdhp.52, 208. (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saŋ + pari + vaj + e), 避免，避开。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~jita。【独】 ~jetvā。(p329)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samparivatta: {'def': '(adj.) [saṁ+parivatta] rolling about Dh.325. (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samparivattaka: {'def': '(adj.) [saṁ+parivattaka] rolling about grovelling J.II,142 (turning somersaults); DhA.II,5, 12; Miln.253, 357; samparivattakaṁ (adv.) in a rolling about manner M.II,138; samparivattakaṁ-samparivattakaṁ continually turning (it) Vin.I,50. (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samparivattati: {'def': '[saṁ+parivattati] to turn, to roll about; ppr. samparivattamāna J.I,140; pp. samparivatta. ‹-› Caus. samparivatteti [cp. BSk. °parivartayati to wring one’s hands Divy 263] to turn over in one’s mind, to ponder over S.V,89. (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(san + pari + vat + a), 转，滚动。【过】 ~vatti。【独】~vattitvā。【使】 samparivatteti。(p329)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(san+pari+vat+a), 转，滚动。【过】samparivatti。【独】samparivattitvā。【使】samparivatteti。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samparivāreti: {'def': '(saṁ+pari+var+e), 包围，侍候，照料。【过】samparivāresi。【过分】samparivārita。【独】samparivāretvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + pari + var + e), 包围，侍候，照料。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~vārita。【独】 ~retvā。(p329)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+parivāreti] to surround, wait upon, attend on J.I,61; aor. 3^rd pl. samparivāresuṁ J.I,164; ger. samparivārayitvā J.I,61; °etvā (do.) J.VI,43, 108. Cp. sampavāreti. (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samparivāsita: {'def': 'see parivāsita. (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samparāya: {'def': '[fr. saṁ+parā+i] future state, the next world Vin.II,162; A.III,154; IV,284 sq.; D.II,240; S.I,108; Sn.141, 864, J.I,219; III,195; Miln.357; DhA.II,50. (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】未来的情况，彼世。 ~yika, 【形】彼世的。(p328)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】未来的情况，来世。samparāyika,【形】来世的。samparāya vedanīya kamma﹐后生报业、顺后业、顺后受业，即至未来世才受果报的业。(顺现法受业(此生)、顺次生受业(来生)、顺后次受业(第三生之后))', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samparāyika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. last] belonging to the next world Vin.I,179; III,21; D.II,240; III,130; A.III,49, 364; IV,285; M.I,87; It.17, 39; J.II,74. (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampassati: {'def': '[saṁ+passati] to see, behold; to look to, to consider; ppr sampassanto Vin.I,42; D.II,285; sampassaṁ Dh.290. (Page 692)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+dis指出+a), 见，把…视为，考虑。【过】sampassi。【现分】sampassanta﹐sampassamāna。【独】sampassitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + dis + a), 见，把…视为，考虑。【过】 ~ssi。【现分】 ~santa,~samāna。【独】 ~sitvā。(p329)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sampasāda: {'def': '[saṁ+pasāda] serenity, pleasure D.II,211, 222; A.II,199; M.II,262. (Page 692)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】快乐，平静。 ~daniya, 【形】导致宁静的，激发信心的。(p329)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】安然，平静，快乐。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sampasādana: {'def': '[saṁ+pasādana] (nt.) tranquillizing D.I,37; Dhs.161; Miln.34; Vism.156; DhsA.170 (in the description of the second Jhāna); happiness, joy Bu I.35. (Page 692)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampasādaniya: {'def': '(adj.) [saṁ+pasādaniya] leading to serenity, inspiring faith D.III,99 sq. (the S. Suttanta), 116. (Page 692)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】导致宁静的，激发信心的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sampasādeti: {'def': '(san+pa+sad坐+e), 使喜悦，使纯净。【过】sampasādesi。【过分】sampasādita。【独】sampasādetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(san + pa + sad + e), 使喜悦，使纯净。【过】 ~esi。【过分】~dita。【独】 ~detvā。(p329)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sampasāreti: {'def': '(saṁ+pa+sar(梵sr)动转+e), 展开，伸展。【过】sampasāresi。【过分】sampasārita。【独】sampasāretvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+pasāreti] to stretch out, to distract Vism.365. -- Pass. sampasāriyati A.IV,47; Miln.297; DhsA.376. (Page 692)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saŋ + pa + sar + e), 展开，伸展。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~rita。【独】 ~retvā。(p329)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sampasīdana: {'def': '【中】欢喜，快乐，晴朗。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】欢喜，快乐，晴朗。(p329)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. last] becoming tranquillized Nett 28. (Page 692)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampasīdati: {'def': '(saŋ + pa + sad + a), 被取悦，变晴，放松。【过】 ~sīdi。【独】~ditvā。(p329)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+pa+sad坐+a), 被取悦，变晴，放松。【过】sampasīdi。【独】sampasīditvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+pasīdati] to be tranquillized, reassured D.I,106; M.I,101; DA.I,275. (Page 692)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampatati: {'def': '[saṁ+patati] to jump about, to fly along or about J.VI,528 (dumā dumaṁ); imper, sampatantu, ib. VI,448 (itarītaraṁ); ppr. sampatanto flying to J.III,491. pp. sampatita. (Page 690)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampati: {'def': '【无】刚刚。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+paṭi; cp. Sk. samprati] now Miln.87; sampatijāta, just born D.II,15=M.III,123. Cp. sampaṭike. (Page 690)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【无】刚刚。(p328)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sampatita: {'def': '(sampatati 的【过分】), 已跌落，已发生。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of sampatati] jumping about J.VI,507. (Page 690)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(sampatati 的【过分】), 已跌落，已发生。(p328)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sampatta: {'def': '(sampāpuṇāti 的【过分】), 已到达。(p328)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(sampāpuṇāti 的【过分】), 已到达。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of sampāpuṇāti] reached, arrived, come to, present J.IV,142; Miln.9, 66; PvA.12; KhA 142; SnA 295; Sdhp.56. (Page 690)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampattakajāta: {'def': 'merged in, given to Ud.75 [read sammattaka (?)]. (Page 690)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampatthanā: {'def': '(f.) [saṁ+patthanā] entreating, imploring Dhs.1059. (Page 690)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampatti: {'def': 'sampadā, 【阴】财富，快乐，成功，达到。(p328)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [saṁ+patti²] 1. success, attainment; happiness, bliss, fortune (opp. vipatti) A.IV,26, 160; Vism.58, 232; J.IV,3 (dibba°); DA.I,126; three attainments J.I,105; Miln.96; DhA.III,183 (manussa°, devaloka°, nibbāna°); Nett 126 (sīla°, samādhi°, paññā°; cp. sampadā); four VbhA.439 sq. (gati°, upadhi°, kāla°, payoga°); six J.I,105; nine Miln.341. -- 2. excellency, magnificence SnA 397; rūpasampatti beauty J.III,187; IV,333. -- 3. honour Mhvs 22, 48. -- 4. prosperity, splendour J.IV,455; Mhvs 38, 92; s. bhavaloko Ps.I,122. Cp. samāpatti & sampadā. (Page 690)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'sampadā(‹saṁ+pad, cp. BSk. sampadā),【阴】财富，快乐，成功，达到。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sampavattar: {'def': '[saṁ+pavattar] an instigator A.III,133. (Page 692)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampavatteti: {'def': '(saŋ + pa + vat + e), 决心就走。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~ttita。(p329)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+pa+vat+e), 决心就走。【过】sampavattesi。【过分】sampavattita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+pavatteti] to produce, set going A.III,222 (saṁvāsaṁ); Mhvs 23, 75. (Page 692)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampavaṅka: {'def': '(adj.) [perhaps saṁ+pari+aṅka², contracted to *payyaṅka›*pavaṅka] intimate, friend D.II,78; S.I,83, 87; Pug.36. (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '﹐[perhaps saṁ+pari+aṅka2] 【形】亲密的(intimate)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sampavaṅkatā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. last] connection, friendliness, intimacy S.I,87; A.III,422 (pāpa° & kalyāṇa°); IV,283 sq.; V,24, 199; Dhs.1326; Pug.20, 24; DhsA.394. Cp. anu° Vin.II,88. (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampavaṇṇita: {'def': '(adj.) [saṁ+pa+vaṇṇita] described, praised J.VI,398. (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampavedhati: {'def': '(saṁ+pa+vidh(梵vyadh / vidh)贯穿+a), 强震，被高度地影响。【过】sampavedhi。【过分】sampavedhita。【使】sampavedheti。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + pa + vidh + a), 被猛烈地摇动，被高度地影响。【过】~vedhi。【过分】 ~dhita。【使】 sampavedheti。(p329)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+pavedhati] to be shaken violently, to be highly affected Vin.I,12; D.II,12, 108; M.I,227; Th.2, 231; J.I,25; S.IV,71. -- Caus. sampavedheti to shake violently D.II,108; M.I,253; Nd¹ 316, 371 (pp. °pavedhita). (Page 692)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampavedhin: {'def': 'to be shaken Sn.28; Miln.386. (Page 692)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampavāreti: {'def': '[saṁ+pavāreti; cp. BSk. saṁpravārayati Divy 285, 310, etc.; AvŚ I.90; MVastu III,142] to cause to accept, to offer, to regale, serve with; ger. sampavāretvā Vin.I,18; II,128; D.I,109; aor. sampavāresi D.II,97. (Page 692)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampavāti: {'def': '[saṁ+pavāti] to blow, to be fragrant M.I,212; J.VI,534; VvA.343 (=Vv 84³²). (Page 692)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampavāyana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. last] making fragrant VvA.344. (Page 692)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampavāyati: {'def': '[saṁ+pavāyati] to make fragrant, Vv 81⁶, 84³²; VvA.344. (Page 692)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(san + pa + vā + a), 吹，发出。(p329)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(san+pa+vā+a), 吹，发出。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sampayoga: {'def': '[saṁ+payoga] union, association Vin.I,10; S.V,421; DA.I,96, 260. (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+pa+yuj连接；梵samprayoga),【阳】相应，联盟，协会，联系。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】联盟，协会，联系。(p328)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sampayojeti: {'def': '[saṁ+payojeti] 1. to associate (with) Vin.II,262; M.II,5. -- 2. to quarrel Vin.II,5; S.I,239. -- pp. sampayutta. (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(san+pa+yuj连接+e), 参加，联合，提出诉讼。【过】sampayojesi。【过分】sampayojita。【独】sampayojetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(san + pa + yuj + e), 参加，联合，提出诉讼。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~jita。【独】 ~jetvā。(p328)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sampayutta: {'def': '【形】联合的，联在一起的。(p328)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+payutta] associated with, connected Dhs.1; Kvu 337; DhsA.42. --°paccaya the relation of association (opp. vippayutta°) Vism.539; VbhA.206; Tikp 6, 20, 53, 65, 152 sq.; Dukp 1 sq. (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+payutta),【形】联合的(associated with)，联结的(connected)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sampayāta: {'def': '【过分】已向前去，已著手进行。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【过分】已向前去，已着手进行。(p328)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+payāta] gone forth, proceeded Dh.237. (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampayāti: {'def': '[saṁ+payāti] to proceed, to go on; inf. sampayātave Sn.834; pp. sampayāta. (Page 691)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampaṭicchana: {'def': '【中】承诺，协议。(p328)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】承诺，协定。sampaṭicchanacitta 【中】领受心，当目标撞击五根门之一，如：颜色撞击眼根时，先生起令心转向该目标的转向心，随后生起眼识(识知颜色)，接著生起「领受心」，纳受眼识刚看过的目标。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. last] acceptance, agreement DhsA.332; SnA 176 (“sādhu”); Vism.21; Sdhp.59, 62. (Page 690)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampaṭicchati: {'def': '(saŋ + pati + is + a), 接受。【过】 ~cchi。【过分】 ~chita。【独】 ~chitvā。(p328)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+paṭicchati] to receive, accept J.I,69; III,351; Mhvs 6, 34; ovādaṁ s. to comply with an admonition J.III,52; sādhū ti s. to say “well” and agree J.II,31; Miln.8. Caus. II. sampaṭicchāpeti J.VI,336. (Page 690)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+pati+is+a), 接受。【过】sampaṭicchi。【过分】sampaṭicchita。【独】sampaṭicchitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sampaṭiggaha: {'def': '[saṁ+paṭiggaha] summing up, agreement KhA 100. (Page 690)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampaṭike: {'def': '(adv.) [Loc. fr. saṁ+paṭi+ka] now J.IV,432 (=sampati, idāni C.). (Page 690)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampaṭinipajjā: {'def': '(f.) [saṁ+paṭi+nipajjā] squatting down, lying down ThA.111. (Page 690)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampaṭisaṁkhā: {'def': 'deliberately S.II,111; contracted from ger. °-saṁkhāya. (Page 690)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampaṭivedha: {'def': '[saṁ+paṭivedha] penetration Nett 27, 41, 42, 220. (Page 690)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampaṭivijjhati: {'def': '[saṁ+paṭivijjhati] to penetrate; Pass. sampaṭivijjhiyati Nett 220. (Page 690)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampha: {'def': '【中】轻薄，废话。samppalāpa,【阳】绮语。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】轻薄，废话。 ~ppalāpa, 【阳】绮语。(p330)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.-n.) [not clear, if & how connected with Sk. śaśpa, grass. The BSk. has sambhinna-pralāpa for sampha-ppalāpa] frivolous; nt. frivolity, foolishness; only in connection with expressions of talking, as samphaṁ bhāsati to speak frivolously A.II,23; Sn.158; samphaṁ giraṁ bh. J.VI,295; samphaṁ palapati Tikp 167 sq. ‹-› Also in cpds. °palāpa frivolous talk D.I,4; III,69, 82, 175, 269; A.I,269 sq., 298; II,60, 84, 209; III,254, 433; IV, 248; V,251 sq., 261 sq.; Tikp 168, 281; DA.I,76; °palāpin talking frivolously D.I,138; III,82; A.I,298; Pug.39, 58. (Page 693)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samphala: {'def': '(saṁ+phala)﹐【形】(完全)结果。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [saṁ+phala] abounding in fruits S.I,70; 90=It.45. (Page 693)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samphassa: {'def': '【阳】触，接触。(p330)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】触，接触。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+phassa] contact, reaction Vin.I,3; A.II,117; D.II,62; M.I,85; J.I,502; kāya-s. the touch of the skin D.II,75; cakkhu-, sota-, ghāna-, jivhā-, kāya-, and mano-s. D.II,58, 308; S.IV,68 sq.; VbhA.19. (Page 693)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samphulla: {'def': '【形】盛开的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [saṁ+phulla] full-blown J.VI,188. (Page 693)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】盛开的。(p330)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samphusanā: {'def': '(saṁ一起+phusanā触),【阴】一起触，接触(touch, contact)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [saṁ+phusanā] touch, contact Th.2, 367; Dhs.2, 71. (Page 693)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】触，接触。(p330)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samphusati: {'def': '(saŋ + phus + a), 接触，触及。【过】 ~phusi。【独】 ~sitvā。(p330)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+phus+a), 接触，触及。【过】samphusi。【独】samphusitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+phusati] to touch, to come in contact with; ppr. samphussaṁ It.68; ppr. med. samphusamāna Sn.671; Nd² 199 (reads samphassamāna, where id. p. at M.I,85 has rissamāna); aor. samphusi D.II,128; inf. samphusituṁ Sn.835; D.II,355; pp. samphuṭṭha. (Page 693)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samphusita: {'def': '【过分】已接触，已触及。(p330)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【过分】已接触，已触及。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samphusitatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. samphusita] the state of having been brought into touch with Dhs.2, 71. (Page 693)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samphuṭṭha: {'def': '(samphusati 的【过分】)。(p330)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of samphassati] touched S.IV,97; Av.103; It.68. (Page 693)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(samphusati 的【过分】) 已接触，已触及。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sampiya: {'def': '(adj.) [saṁ+piya] friendly; sampiyena by mutual consent, in mutual love Sn.123, 290. (Page 692)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampiyāyanā: {'def': '(f.) [saṁ+piyāyanā] intimate relation, great fondness J.III,492. (Page 692)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】喜爱。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】喜爱。(p330)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sampiyāyati: {'def': '(sampiya 的【派】), 善待，执着，投入，喜欢。【过】 ~yāyi。【过分】 ~yita。【现分】 ~yanta, ~yamāna。【独】 ~yitvā。(p329)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+piyāyati] to receive with joy, to treat kindly, address with love J.III,482; ppr. sampiyāyanto J.I,135; sampiyāyamāna (do.) fondling, being fond of D.II,223; J.I,191, 297, 361; II,85; DhA.II,65. aor. 3^rd pl. sampiyāyiṁsu J.VI,127. (Page 692)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(sampiya 的【派】), 善待，执著，投入，喜欢。【过】sampiyāyi。【过分】sampiyāyita。【现分】sampiyāyanta, sampiyāyamāna。【独】sampiyāyitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sampiṇḍana: {'def': '【中】组合，连接，附加。(p329)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. saṁ+piṇḍ°] combining, connection, addition Vism.159 (of “ca”); KhA 228 (id.); DhsA.171. (Page 692)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】组合，连接，附加。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sampiṇḍeti: {'def': '(saŋ + piṇḍ + e), 联合，弄成球型，节略。【过】 ~esi。【过分】~ḍita。【独】 ~ḍetvā。(p329)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+piṇḍeti] to knead or ball together, combine, unite Vism.159; KhA 125, 221, 230; DhsA.177; pp. sampiṇḍita. (Page 692)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+piṇḍ+e), 联合，弄成球型，节略。【过】sampiṇḍesi。【过分】sampiṇḍita。【独】sampiṇḍetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sampiṇḍita: {'def': '[pp. of sampiṇḍeti] brought together, restored J.I,230; compact, firm J.V,89. (Page 692)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampucchati: {'def': '(saŋ + pucch + a), 要求，请求许可。【过】 ~cchi。【过分】~puṭṭha。(p330)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+pucch询问+a), 要求，请求许可。【过】sampucchi。【过分】sampuṭṭha。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+pucchati] to ask D.I,116; ger. sampuccha having made an appointment with S.I,176. (Page 692)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampupphita: {'def': '[saṁ+pupphita] in full bloom Pv IV.12 (=niccaṁ pupphita PvA.275). (Page 693)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【过分】已完全开花。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【过分】已完全开花。(p330)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sampurekkharoti: {'def': '[saṁ+purakkharoti] to honour M.II,169. (Page 693)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampuṇṇa: {'def': '(sampūrati 的【过分】), 已满，已完全，已填。(p330)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(sampūrati 的【过分】), 已满，已完全，已填，熟透。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(sampūrṇa) filled, full Sn.279; Bu II.119= J.I,20; Mhvs 22, 60. (Page 693)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampuṭa: {'def': '[cp. saṁ+puṭa (lexicogr. Sk. sampuṭa “round box”) & BSk. sampuṭa in meaning “añjali” at Divy 380, in phrase kṛta-kara-sampuṭah] the hollow of the hand (in posture of veneration), in pāṇi° Mhvs 37, 192, i. e. Cūḷavaṁsa (ed. Geiger) p. 15. (Page 692)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampuṭita: {'def': '[saṁ+puṭita = phuṭita, cp. BSk. sampuṭaka MVastu II.127] shrunk, shrivelled M.I,80. (Page 693)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampādaka: {'def': '【形】准备者，供应者。 ~dana, 【中】供应，准备好。(p329)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】准备者，供应者。sampādana,【中】供应，准备好。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. sampādeti] one who obtains Miln.349. (Page 692)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampādana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. sampādeti] effecting, accomplishment Nett 44; preparing, obtaining J.I,80. (Page 692)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampādeti: {'def': '[Caus. of sampajjati] 1. to procure, obtain Vin.I,217; II,214; ekavacanaṁ s. to be able to utter a single word J.II,164; kathaṁ s. to be able to talk J.II,165; dohaḷe s. to satisfy the longing Mhvs 22, 51. -- 2. to strive, to try to accomplish one’s aim D.II,120; S.II,29 (Page 692)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+pad去+e), 完成，供应，准备。【过】sampādesi。【过分】sampādita。【独】sampādetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + pad + e), 试着完成，供应，准备。【过】 ~esi。【过分】~dita。【独】 ~detvā。(p329)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sampādiyati: {'def': '(sampādeti 的【被】), 被供应。(p329)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(sampādeti 的【被】), 被供应。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sampājanamusāvāda: {'def': '【阳】故妄语(deliberate lie)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sampāka: {'def': '[saṁ+pāka] 1. what is cooked, a cooked preparation, concoction Vin.II,259 (maṁsa° etc.); Vv 43⁵ (kola°); VvA.186. -- 2. ripeness, development J.VI,236. (Page 692)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampāleti: {'def': '[saṁ+pāleti] to protect J.IV,127. (Page 692)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampāpaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. sampāpeti] causing to obtain, leading to, bringing J.III,348; VI,235. (Page 692)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】导致的，带来的。 ~pana, 【中】领导，到达。(p329)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】导致的，带来的。sampāpana,【中】领导，到达。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sampāpana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. sampāpuṇāti] reaching, getting to Miln.355, 356 (tīra°). (Page 692)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampāpuṇāti: {'def': '(saṁ+pa+ap +uṇā), 到达，达到，偶遇。【过】sampāpuṇi。【过分】sampatta。【现分】sampāpuṇanta。【独】sampāpuṇitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + pa + ap + uṇā), 到达，达到，偶遇。【过】 ~puṇi。【过分】 sampatta。【现分】 ~ṇanta。【独】 ~puṇitvā。(p329)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+pāpuṇāti] to reach, attain; to come to, meet with; aor. sampāpuṇi J.I,67; II,20; pp. sampatta. -- Caus. sampāpeti to bring, to make attain Vism.303. (Page 692)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampāruta: {'def': '[saṁ+pāruta] (quite) covered M.I,281. (Page 692)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampāta: {'def': '【阳】结合起来，同时存在，碰撞。(p329)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+pāta] falling together, concurrence, collision It.68; kukkuṭasampāta neighbouring, closely adjoining (yasmā gāmā nikkhamitvā kukkuṭo padasā va aññaṁ gāmaṁ gacchati, ayaṁ kukkuṭasampāto ti vuccati) Vin.IV,63, 358; kukkuṭasampātaka lying close together (lit. like a flock of poultry) A.I,159. Cp. the similar sannipāta. (Page 692)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】结合起来，同时存在，碰撞。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sampāyati: {'def': '(saṁ+pa+ā+ī (?))﹐解说，解答。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[derⁿ not clear; Kern, Toev. I.62=sampādayati; but more likely=sampāyāti, i. e. sam+pa+ā+yā] to be able to explain (DA.I,117: sampādetvā kathetuṁ sakkuṇoti), to agree, to come to terms, succeed D.I,26; II,284; M.I,85, 96, 472; II,157; A.V,50; S.IV,15, 67; V,109; Vin.II,249 (cp. p. 364); aor. sampāyāsi M.I,239. Cp. sampayāti. (Page 692)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampīḷa: {'def': '(nt.) [saṁ+pīḷa, cp. pīḷā] trouble, pain; asampīḷaṁ free from trouble Miln.351. (Page 692)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '[saṁ+pīḷa, cp.pīḷā] 【中】烦恼，痛苦。【反】asampīḷa无烦恼( free from trouble)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sampīḷana: {'def': 'Saṁpīḷana, 压迫，局促，龌龊(ㄨㄛˋㄔㄨㄛˋ，台语：ak cak8，有局促(而不舒服)、恶浊之意)。citta-sampīḷanaṁ domanassa, 心压迫之苦。kāyasampīlana, 心压迫(之苦)(crushing the body (of dukkha))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sampīḷeti: {'def': '(saṁ+pīḷ虐待+e), 压迫，压破，烦恼。【过】sampīḷesi。【过分】sampīḷita。【独】sampīḷetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + pīḷ + e), 压迫，烦恼，压破。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~ḷita。【独】 ~ḷetvā。(p330)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+pīḷeti] to press, to pinch, to worry Vin.III,126; pp. sampīḷita. (Page 692)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampīḷita: {'def': '[pp. of sampīḷeti] troubled; as nt., worry, trouble Miln.368. (Page 692)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sampīṇeti: {'def': '[saṁ+pīṇeti] to satisfy, gladden, please; aor. 2^nd sg. sampesi J.III,253; ger. sampīṇayitvā Dāvs.IV,11. (Page 692)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saŋ + pi + ṇā + e), 使满意，使喜悦，取悦。【过】 ~esi。【过分】~ṇita。【独】 ~ṇetvā。(p330)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+pi养肥+ṇā+e), 使满意，使喜悦，取悦。【过】sampīṇesi。【过分】sampīṇita。【独】sampīṇetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sampūjeti: {'def': '[saṁ+pūjeti] to venerate Mhvs 30, 100. (Page 693)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+pūj礼拜+e), 致敬，尊敬。【过】sampūjesi。【过分】sampūjita。【现分】sampūjenta。【独】sampūjetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + pūj + e), 致敬，尊敬。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~jita。【现分】 ~jenta。【独】 ~jetvā。(p330)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sampūreti: {'def': '(saŋ + pūr + e), 填充，完成。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~rita。【独】~retvā。(p330)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+pūr(梵pr / prṇ/ pūr)充满+e), 填充，完成。【过】sampūresi。【过分】sampūrita。【独】sampūretvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+pūreti] Pass. pūriyati° to be filled, ended; aor. sampūri (māso, “it was a full month since . . .”) J.IV,458. (Page 693)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samubbahati: {'def': '(saŋ + u + vah + a), 负担，携带。【过】 ~bahi。【现分】~bahanta。【独】 ~bahitvā。【动名】 ~bahana。(p327)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+ubbahati²] to carry Dāvs III,3; V,35; ppr. samubbahanto J.VI,21 (making display of). (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saṁ+u出+vah+a), 负担，携带。【过】samubbahi。【现分】samubbahanta。【独】samubbahitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samubbhavati: {'def': '(saṁ+u出+bhū+a), 出现，被生产。【过】samubbhavi。【过分】samubbhūta。【独】samubbhavitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + u + bhū + a), 出现，被生产。【过】 ~bhavi。【过分】~bhūta。【独】 ~bhavitvā。(p327)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samubbhūta: {'def': '[saṁ+ud+bhūta] borne from, produced from Dāvs II.25. (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samucca-saṅgaha-vibhāga: {'def': 'm. 摄集分别', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Samuccaya: {'def': '[saṁ+uccaya] collection, accumulation J.II,235 (the signification of the particle vā); SnA 266 (id.). -- samuccaya-kkhandhaka the third section of Cullavagga Vin.II,38--72. (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】类目，收集，积聚。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】收集，积聚。(p325)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samuccayakkhandhaka: {'def': 'm. 集犍度', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Samucchaka: {'def': 'see samuñchaka. (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samucchati: {'def': '[derivation and meaning uncertain; Windisch, Buddha’s Geburt, p. 39, n. 1 derives it fr. saṁ+mucchati. Cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 157] to be consolidated, to arise samucchissatha (Conditional) D.II,63. (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samuccheda: {'def': '(sam+u+chida),【阳】正断(永远舍断烦恼)、断绝。samuccheappahāna,【中】正断、断绝。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+uccheda] cutting off, abolishing, giving up M.I,360; KhA 142; sammā s. Ps.I,101; °pahāna relinquishing by extirpation Vism.5; SnA 9; °maraṇa dying by extirpation (of saṁsāra) Vism.229; °visuddhi Ps.II,3; °suññaṁ Ps.ii.180. (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samucchindana: {'def': '【中】samuccheda,【阳】消灭，破坏。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】 samuccheda, 【阳】消灭，破坏。(p325)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samucchindati: {'def': '(saŋ + u + chid + ŋ-a), 消灭，废止，破坏。【过】 ~ndi。【独】~ndiya。 ~nditvā。(p325)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+u出+chid切断+ṁ-a), 消灭，废止，破坏。【过】samucchindi。【独】samucchindiya。samucchinditvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+ucchindati] to extirpate, abolish, spoil, give up D.I,34; II,74; M.I,101 sq., 360; J.IV,63. ‹-› pp. samucchinna. (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samucchinna: {'def': '(Samucchindati的【过分】) 已消灭，已废止，已破坏。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+ucchinna] cut off, extirpated D.I,34. (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samucchita: {'def': '[saṁ+mucchita] infatuated S.I,187; IV,71; Th.1, 1219. It is better to read pamucchita at all passages. (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samucita: {'def': '【过分】已累积。(p325)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【过分】已累积。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+ucita, pp. of uc to be pleased] suitable Vin.IV,147 (must mean something else here, perhaps “hurt,” or “frightened”) Dāvs.V,55. (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samudaya: {'def': '(saṁ一起+udaya上升﹑生长),【阳】1.起源、集(origin)，上升(rise)，一起上升(直译)。2.迸发、光辉(bursting forth, effulgence)(=pabhāsamudaya)。3.生产品(produce, revenue)。samudayasacca,【中】集谛(起源的事实)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+udaya] 1. rise, origin D.I,17; II,33, 308; III,227; A.I,263 (kamma°); Vin.I,10; Sn.p. 135; It.16 (samuddaya metri causa) etc. dukkha° the origin of ill, the second ariya-sacca, e. g. D.III,136; A.I,177; Vism.495 (where samudaya is expl^d in its parts as sam+ u+aya); VbhA.124. -- 2. bursting forth, effulgence (pabhā°) J.I,83.- 3. produce, revenue D.I,227. (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】集，上升，起源，生产品。 ~sacca, 【中】集谛（起源的事实）。(p326)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samudda: {'def': '【阳】海洋。 ~ṭṭhaka, 【形】在大海中的。(p326)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Vedic samudra, fr. saṁ+udra, water] a (large) quantity of water, e. g. the Gaṅges; the sea, the ocean D.I,222; M.I,493; A.I,243; II,48 sq.; III,240; D.III,196, 198; S.I,6, 32, 67; J.I,230; IV,167, 172; Dh.127; Nd¹ 353; SnA 30; PvA.47, 104, 133, 271; explained by adding sāgara, S.II,32; four oceans S.II,180, 187; ThA.111. Often characterized as mahā° the great ocean, e. g. Vin.II,237; A.I,227; II,55; III,52; IV,101; SnA 371; DhA.III,44. Eight qualities: A.IV,198, 206; popular etymology Miln.85 sq. (viz. “yattakaṁ udakaṁ tattakaṁ loṇaṁ,” and vice versa); the eye etc. (the senses), an ocean which engulfs all beings S.IV,157 (samudda=mahā udakarāsi). -- Cp. sāmuddika.

--akkhāyikā (f.) tales about the origin of the sea, cosmogony Vin.I,188; M.I,513 sq.; D.I,8; DA.I,91. --ṭṭhaka situated in the ocean J.VI,158. --vīci a wave of the ocean Vism.63. (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】海洋。samuddaṭṭhaka,【形】在大海中的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samuddaya: {'def': 'metri causa instead of samudaya It.16, 52. (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samuddharana: {'def': '(nt.) [saṁ+uddharaṇa] pulling out, salvation Miln.232. (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samuddharati: {'def': '(saṁ+u出+har拿+a), 举起，取出，抢救。【过】samuddhari。【独】samuddharitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+uddharati] to take out or away; to lift up, carry away, save from; aor. samuddhari J.VI,271; samuddhāsi (aor. thus read instead of samuṭṭhāsi) J.V,70. (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saŋ + u + har + a), 举起，取出，抢救。【过】 ~dhari。【独】~dharitvā。(p326)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samuddharaṇa: {'def': '【中】拉出，拯救。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】拉出，拯救。(p326)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samuddhaṭa: {'def': '[saṁ+uddhaṭa] pulled out, eradicated Mhvs 59, 15; J.VI,309; Sdhp.143. (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(samuddharati 的【过分】)。(p326)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(samuddharati 的【过分】)已举起，已取出，已抢救。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samudeti: {'def': '[saṁ+udeti] to arise; pres. samudayati (v. l. samudīyati) S.II,78; samudeti A.III,338; pp. samudita. (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saŋ + u + i + a), 出现。【过】 ~esi。(p326)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+u出+i+a), 出现。【过】samudesi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samudikkhati: {'def': '[saṁ+udikkhati] to behold ThA.147 (Ap. V,52). (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samudita: {'def': '(saṁ+udita1已提高)(samudeti 的【过分】)﹐1.已升起(arisen)。2.已激动(excited)。3.已联合(united)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+udita¹] 1. arisen Dāvs.V,4. -- 2. excited S.I,136. -- 3. united VvA.321. (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(samudeti 的【过分】)。(p326)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samudācarana: {'def': '【中】samudācāra,【阳】行为，习惯，练习，熟悉。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】 Samudācāra, 【阳】行为，习惯，练习，熟悉。(p326)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samudācarati: {'def': '(saṁ+u出+ā+car移动+a),1.流通(to be current)，使用( to be in use)。2.在...心里出现(to occur to)，3.对…举止(to behave towards)，4.练习(to practise﹐i.e. aor. samudācariṁsu)。5.吹嘘、夸耀(to claim, to boast of)。【过】samudācari。【过分】samudācarita﹐samudāciṇṇa。【独】samudācaritvā。【过分】samudācaranta。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(saŋ + u + ā + car + a), 对…举止，想起，经常出入。【过】~cari。【过分】 ~carita。【独】 ~caritvā。(p326)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[saṁ+ud+ācarati] 1. to be current, to be in use M.I,40 (=kāya-vacī-dvāraṁ sampatta s. MA 182). -- 2. to occur to, to befall, beset, assail M.I,109, 112, 453; S.II,273; It.31; Vism.343. -- 3. to behave towards, to converse with (Instr.), to address Vin.I,9; D.II,154, 192; A.III,124, 131; IV,415, 440; V,103; J.I,192. -- 4. to practise J.II,33 (aor. °ācariṁsu). -- 5. to claim, to boast of Vin.III,91. -- pp. samudāciṇṇa. (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samudācaritatta: {'def': '(‹samudācarita) 【中】练习(to practise)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. samudācarita, pp. of samudācarati] practice Miln.59. (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samudāciṇṇa: {'def': '(samudācarati 的【过分】), 已练习，已放任。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(samudācarati 的【过分】), 已练习，已放任。(p326)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of samudācarati] practised, indulged in J.II,33; Tikp 320. (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samudācāra: {'def': '[saṁ+ud+ācāra] behaviour, practice, habit, familiarity J.IV,22; SnA 6; DhsA.392; PvA.279. (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samudāgacchati: {'def': '[saṁ+udāgacchati]﹐生起(to rise)，结果(to result)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+udāgacchati] to result, rise; to be got, to be at hand D.I,116; M.I,104. -- pp. samudāgata. (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samudāgama: {'def': '(saṁ+ud+āgama),【阳】开始(beginning)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+ud+āgama] beginning J.I,2. (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samudāgata: {'def': '[pp. of last] arisen, resulted; received S.II,24; Sn.648 (=āgata C.). (Page 687)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【samudāgacchati的过分】已兴起(arisen)，已结果(resulted)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【过分】已兴起，已结果。 ~gama, 【阳】上升，产品。(p326)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samudāharati: {'def': '(saŋ + u + ā + har + a), 说，发出。【过】 ~hari。【过分】~haṭa。【独】 ~haritvā。(p326)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(saṁ+u出+ā+har拿+a), 说，发出。【过】samudāhari。【过分】samudāhaṭa。【独】samudāharitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Samudāharaṇa: {'def': '【中】samudāhāra,【阳】交谈，说话。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】 samudāhāra, 【阳】交谈，说话。(p326)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Samudāhāra: {'def': '[saṁ+udāhāra, cp. BSk. samudāhāra Divy 143] talk, conversation Miln.344; piya° A.V,24, 27, 90, 201, 339; ThA.226. (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samudānaya: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. of samudāneti] to be procured or attained J.III,313 (su°). (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samudāneti: {'def': '[saṁ+ud+āneti; cp. BSk. samudānayati Divy 26, 50, 490; AvŚ I.199] to collect, procure, attain, get M.I,104; Sn.295. -- pp. °ānīta. (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samudānīta: {'def': '[pp. of samudāneti, cp. BSk. samudānīta MVastu I.231] collected, procured J.IV,177. (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samudāvaṭa: {'def': '[saṁ+ud+āvaṭa? Better read as saṁ+ udāvatta] restrained DhsA.75. (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Samudāya: {'def': '[fr. saṁ+ud+ā+i] multitude, quantity VvA.175; the whole VvA.276. (Page 688)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】多数，大量。(p326)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】多数，大量。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

【經文資訊】
【原始資料】原始资料皆来自网络
【其他事項】本資料庫可自由免費流通，詳細內容請參閱【中華電子佛典協會資料庫版權宣告】